fix: corrects UI error with JSON fields that use long arrays

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/1.bug_report_v3.yml

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 name: Functionality Bug
 description: '[REPRODUCTION REQUIRED] - Create a bug report'
-labels: ['status: needs-triage', 'validate-reproduction']
+labels: ['status: needs-triage', 'v3', 'validate-reproduction']
 body:
   - type: textarea
     attributes:
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ body:
       label: Link to the code that reproduces this issue
       description: >-
         _REQUIRED_: Please provide a link to your reproduction. Note, if the URL is invalid (404 or a private repository), we may close the issue.
-        Either use `pnpx create-payload-app@latest -t blank` then push to a repo or follow the [reproduction-guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/.github/reproduction-guide.md) for more information.
+        Either use `npx create-payload-app@beta -t blank` then push to a repo or follow the [reproduction-guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/.github/reproduction-guide.md) for more information.
     validations:
       required: true
 
@@ -39,7 +39,6 @@ body:
         - 'db-postgres'
         - 'db-sqlite'
         - 'db-vercel-postgres'
-        - 'email-nodemailer'
         - 'plugin: cloud'
         - 'plugin: cloud-storage'
         - 'plugin: form-builder'
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ body:
   - type: textarea
     attributes:
       label: Environment Info
-      description: Paste output from `pnpm payload info` _or_ Payload, Node.js, and Next.js versions.
+      description: Paste output from `pnpm payload info` (>= beta.92) _or_ Payload, Node.js, and Next.js versions.
       render: text
       placeholder: |
         Payload:

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/2.design_issue.yml

@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ body:
   - type: textarea
     attributes:
       label: Environment Info
-      description: Paste output from `pnpm payload info` _or_ Payload, Node.js, and Next.js versions.
+      description: Paste output from `pnpm payload info` (>= beta.92) _or_ Payload, Node.js, and Next.js versions.
       render: text
       placeholder: |
         Payload:

.github/actions/release-commenter/package.json

@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
   },
   "devDependencies": {
     "@octokit/webhooks-types": "^7.5.1",
-    "@swc/jest": "^0.2.37",
+    "@swc/jest": "^0.2.36",
     "@types/jest": "^27.5.2",
     "@types/node": "^20.16.5",
     "@typescript-eslint/eslint-plugin": "^4.33.0",

.github/actions/release-commenter/tsconfig.json

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 {
   "compilerOptions": {
-    "target": "ES2022",
+    "target": "es5",
     "lib": ["es2020.string"],
     "noEmit": true,
     "strict": true,

.github/actions/setup/action.yml

@@ -1,33 +1,15 @@
 name: Setup node and pnpm
-description: |
-  Configures Node, pnpm, cache, performs pnpm install
+description: Configure the Node.js and pnpm versions
 
 inputs:
   node-version:
-    description: Node.js version
+    description: 'The Node.js version to use'
     required: true
-    default: 22.6.0
+    default: 22.6.2
   pnpm-version:
-    description: Pnpm version
+    description: 'The pnpm version to use'
     required: true
     default: 9.7.1
-  pnpm-run-install:
-    description: Whether to run pnpm install
-    required: false
-    default: true
-  pnpm-restore-cache:
-    description: Whether to restore cache
-    required: false
-    default: true
-  pnpm-install-cache-key:
-    description: The cache key for the pnpm install cache
-    default: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
-
-outputs:
-  pnpm-store-path:
-    description: The resolved pnpm store path
-  pnpm-install-cache-key:
-    description: The cache key used for pnpm install cache
 
 runs:
   using: composite
@@ -48,29 +30,19 @@ runs:
         version: ${{ inputs.pnpm-version }}
         run_install: false
 
-    - name: Get pnpm store path
+    - name: Get pnpm store directory
       shell: bash
       run: |
-        STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)
-        echo "STORE_PATH=$STORE_PATH" >> $GITHUB_ENV
-        echo "Pnpm store path resolved to: $STORE_PATH"
+        echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
 
-    - name: Restore pnpm install cache
-      if: ${{ inputs.pnpm-restore-cache == 'true' }}
+    - name: Setup pnpm cache
       uses: actions/cache@v4
       with:
         path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
-        key: ${{ inputs.pnpm-install-cache-key }}
+        key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
         restore-keys: |
-          pnpm-store-${{ inputs.pnpm-version }}-
           pnpm-store-
+          pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
 
-    - name: Run pnpm install
-      if: ${{ inputs.pnpm-run-install == 'true' }}
-      shell: bash
+    - shell: bash
       run: pnpm install
-
-      # Set the cache key output
-    - run: |
-        echo "pnpm-install-cache-key=${{ inputs.pnpm-install-cache-key }}" >> $GITHUB_ENV
-      shell: bash

.github/actions/triage/tsconfig.json

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 {
   "compilerOptions": {
-    "target": "ES2022",
+    "target": "es5",
     "lib": ["es2020.string"],
     "noEmit": true,
     "strict": true,

.github/dependabot.yml

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ updates:
       - /.github/workflows
       - /.github/actions/* # Not working until resolved: https://github.com/dependabot/dependabot-core/issues/6345
       - /.github/actions/setup
-    target-branch: main
+    target-branch: beta
     schedule:
       interval: monthly
       timezone: America/Detroit
@@ -20,8 +20,7 @@ updates:
 
   - package-ecosystem: npm
     directory: /
-    target-branch: main
-    open-pull-requests-limit: 0 # Only allow security updates
+    target-branch: beta
     schedule:
       interval: weekly
       day: sunday
@@ -39,6 +38,8 @@ updates:
           - patch
         patterns:
           - '*'
+        exclude-patterns:
+          - 'drizzle*'
       dev-deps:
         dependency-type: development
         update-types:
@@ -46,11 +47,13 @@ updates:
           - patch
         patterns:
           - '*'
+        exclude-patterns:
+          - 'drizzle*'
 
+  # Only bump patch versions for 2.x
   - package-ecosystem: npm
     directory: /
-    target-branch: 2.x
-    open-pull-requests-limit: 0 # Only allow security updates
+    target-branch: main
     schedule:
       interval: weekly
       day: sunday
@@ -67,3 +70,5 @@ updates:
           - patch
         patterns:
           - '*'
+        exclude-patterns:
+          - 'drizzle*'

.github/reproduction-guide.md

@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ There are a couple ways run integration tests:
 
 - **Granularly** - you can run individual tests in vscode by installing the Jest Runner plugin and using that to run individual tests. Clicking the `debug` button will run the test in debug mode allowing you to set break points.
 
-  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/assets/images/github/int-debug.png" />
+  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/admin/assets/images/github/int-debug.png" />
 
 - **Manually** - you can run all int tests in the `/test/_community/int.spec.ts` file by running the following command:
 
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ The easiest way to run E2E tests is to install
 
 Once they are installed you can open the `testing` tab in vscode sidebar and drill down to the test you want to run, i.e. `/test/_community/e2e.spec.ts`
 
-<img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/assets/images/github/e2e-debug.png" />
+<img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/admin/assets/images/github/e2e-debug.png" />
 
 #### Notes
 

.github/workflows/label-on-change.yml

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ on:
 
 jobs:
   on-labeled-ensure-one-status:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       issues: write
     # Only run on issue labeled and if label starts with 'status:'
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ jobs:
             }
 
   on-issue-close:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       issues: write
     if: github.event.action == 'closed'
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ jobs:
             }
 
   on-issue-reopen:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       issues: write
     if: github.event.action == 'reopened'
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ jobs:
           labels: 'status: needs-triage'
 
   on-issue-assigned:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       issues: write
     if: >
@@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ jobs:
           labels: 'status: needs-triage'
 
   # on-pr-merge:
-  #   runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+  #   runs-on: ubuntu-latest
   #   if: github.event.pull_request.merged == true
   #   steps:
 
   # on-pr-close:
-  #   runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+  #   runs-on: ubuntu-latest
   #   if: github.event_name == 'pull_request_target' && github.event.pull_request.merged == false
   #   steps:

.github/workflows/lock-issues.yml

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ permissions:
 
 jobs:
   lock_issues:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - name: Lock issues
         uses: dessant/lock-threads@v5

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ on:
   push:
     branches:
       - main
+      - beta
 
 concurrency:
   # <workflow_name>-<branch_name>-<true || commit_sha if branch is protected>
@@ -23,12 +24,11 @@ env:
 
 jobs:
   changes:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       pull-requests: read
     outputs:
       needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}
-      needs_tests: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_tests }}
       templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}
     steps:
       # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
@@ -36,6 +36,8 @@ jobs:
         run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
 
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
       - uses: dorny/paths-filter@v3
         id: filter
         with:
@@ -47,40 +49,53 @@ jobs:
               - 'pnpm-lock.yaml'
               - 'package.json'
               - 'templates/**'
-            needs_tests:
-              - '.github/workflows/**'
-              - 'packages/**'
-              - 'test/**'
-              - 'pnpm-lock.yaml'
-              - 'package.json'
             templates:
               - 'templates/**'
       - name: Log all filter results
         run: |
           echo "needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}"
-          echo "needs_tests: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_tests }}"
           echo "templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}"
 
   lint:
-    # Follows same github's ci skip: [skip lint], [lint skip], [no lint]
     if: >
-      github.event_name == 'pull_request' &&
-      !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, '[skip lint]') &&
-      !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, '[lint skip]') &&
-      !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, '[no lint]')
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+      github.event_name == 'pull_request' && !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, 'no-lint') && !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, 'skip-lint')
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
         with:
           fetch-depth: 0
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
 
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Get pnpm store directory
+        shell: bash
+        run: |
+          echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+
+      - name: Setup pnpm cache
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 720
+        with:
+          path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
+          key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+          restore-keys: |
+            pnpm-store-
+            pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - run: pnpm install
       - name: Lint staged
         run: |
           git diff --name-only --diff-filter=d origin/${GITHUB_BASE_REF}...${GITHUB_SHA}
@@ -89,46 +104,78 @@ jobs:
   build:
     needs: changes
     if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_build == 'true' }}
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
 
     steps:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
 
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Get pnpm store directory
+        shell: bash
+        run: |
+          echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+
+      - name: Setup pnpm cache
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 720
+        with:
+          path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
+          key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+          restore-keys: |
+            pnpm-store-
+            pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - run: pnpm install
       - run: pnpm run build:all
         env:
           DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
 
       - name: Cache build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
 
   tests-unit:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    needs: [changes, build]
-    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_tests == 'true' }}
-    steps:
-      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs: build
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -138,37 +185,9 @@ jobs:
         env:
           NODE_OPTIONS: --max-old-space-size=8096
 
-  tests-types:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    needs: [changes, build]
-    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_tests == 'true' }}
-    steps:
-      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
-
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
-        with:
-          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
-
-      - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v4
-        with:
-          path: ./*
-          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
-
-      - name: Types Tests
-        run: pnpm test:types --target '>=5.7'
-        env:
-          NODE_OPTIONS: --max-old-space-size=8096
-
   tests-int:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    needs: [changes, build]
-    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_tests == 'true' }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs: build
     name: int-${{ matrix.database }}
     strategy:
       fail-fast: false
@@ -180,7 +199,6 @@ jobs:
           - postgres-uuid
           - supabase
           - sqlite
-          - sqlite-uuid
     env:
       POSTGRES_USER: postgres
       POSTGRES_PASSWORD: postgres
@@ -205,21 +223,24 @@ jobs:
 
     steps:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
 
-      - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v4
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
-          path: ./*
-          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - run: pnpm install
 
       - name: Start LocalStack
         run: pnpm docker:start
@@ -254,23 +275,16 @@ jobs:
         if: matrix.database == 'supabase'
 
       - name: Integration Tests
-        uses: nick-fields/retry@v3
+        run: pnpm test:int
         env:
           NODE_OPTIONS: --max-old-space-size=8096
           PAYLOAD_DATABASE: ${{ matrix.database }}
           POSTGRES_URL: ${{ env.POSTGRES_URL }}
-        with:
-          retry_on: any
-          max_attempts: 5
-          timeout_minutes: 15
-          command: pnpm test:int
-          on_retry_command: pnpm clean:build && pnpm install --no-frozen-lockfile
 
   tests-e2e:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    needs: [changes, build]
-    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_tests == 'true' }}
-    name: e2e-${{ matrix.suite }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs: build
+    name: ${{ matrix.suite }}
     strategy:
       fail-fast: false
       matrix:
@@ -278,38 +292,24 @@ jobs:
         suite:
           - _community
           - access-control
-          - admin__e2e__general
-          - admin__e2e__list-view
-          - admin__e2e__document-view
+          - admin__e2e__1
+          - admin__e2e__2
           - admin-root
           - auth
-          - auth-basic
-          - joins
           - field-error-states
           - fields-relationship
-          - fields__collections__Array
+          - fields
           - fields__collections__Blocks
-          - fields__collections__Checkbox
-          - fields__collections__Collapsible
-          - fields__collections__ConditionalLogic
-          - fields__collections__CustomID
-          - fields__collections__Date
-          - fields__collections__Email
-          - fields__collections__Indexed
-          - fields__collections__JSON
-          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__main
-          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__blocks
-          - fields__collections__Number
-          - fields__collections__Point
-          - fields__collections__Radio
+          - fields__collections__Array
           - fields__collections__Relationship
           - fields__collections__RichText
-          - fields__collections__Row
-          - fields__collections__Select
+          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__main
+          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__blocks
+          - fields__collections__Date
+          - fields__collections__Number
+          - fields__collections__Point
           - fields__collections__Tabs
-          - fields__collections__Tabs2
           - fields__collections__Text
-          - fields__collections__UI
           - fields__collections__Upload
           - live-preview
           - localization
@@ -324,19 +324,24 @@ jobs:
     env:
       SUITE_NAME: ${{ matrix.suite }}
     steps:
-      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -368,13 +373,7 @@ jobs:
         run: pnpm exec playwright install-deps chromium
 
       - name: E2E Tests
-        uses: nick-fields/retry@v3
-        with:
-          retry_on: any
-          max_attempts: 5
-          timeout_minutes: 20
-          command: PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME=results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json pnpm test:e2e:prod:ci ${{ matrix.suite }}
-          on_retry_command: pnpm clean:build && pnpm install --no-frozen-lockfile && pnpm build:all
+        run: PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME=results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json pnpm test:e2e:prod:ci ${{ matrix.suite }}
         env:
           PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME: results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json
           NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1
@@ -396,7 +395,7 @@ jobs:
 
   # Build listed templates with packed local packages
   build-templates:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     needs: build
     strategy:
       matrix:
@@ -415,12 +414,6 @@ jobs:
           - template: with-vercel-postgres
             database: postgres
 
-          - template: plugin
-
-          # Re-enable once PG conncection is figured out
-          # - template: with-vercel-website
-          #   database: postgres
-
     name: ${{ matrix.template }}-${{ matrix.database }}
 
     env:
@@ -429,19 +422,24 @@ jobs:
       POSTGRES_DB: payloadtests
 
     steps:
-      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -470,7 +468,6 @@ jobs:
         uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.11.0
         with:
           mongodb-version: 6.0
-        if: matrix.database == 'mongodb'
 
       - name: Build Template
         run: |
@@ -478,23 +475,28 @@ jobs:
           pnpm runts scripts/build-template-with-local-pkgs.ts ${{ matrix.template }} $POSTGRES_URL
 
   tests-type-generation:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    needs: [changes, build]
-    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_tests == 'true' }}
-    steps:
-      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs: build
 
-      - name: Node setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-run-install: false
-          pnpm-restore-cache: false # Full build is restored below
-          pnpm-install-cache-key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -508,16 +510,13 @@ jobs:
   all-green:
     name: All Green
     if: always()
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     needs:
       - lint
       - build
-      - build-templates
       - tests-unit
       - tests-int
       - tests-e2e
-      - tests-types
-      - tests-type-generation
 
     steps:
       - if: ${{ always() && (contains(needs.*.result, 'failure') || contains(needs.*.result, 'cancelled')) }}
@@ -525,8 +524,8 @@ jobs:
 
   publish-canary:
     name: Publish Canary
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    if: ${{ needs.all-green.result == 'success' && github.ref_name == 'main' }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    if: ${{ needs.all-green.result == 'success' && github.ref_name == 'beta' }}
     needs:
       - all-green
 
@@ -534,4 +533,4 @@ jobs:
       # debug github.ref output
       - run: |
           echo github.ref: ${{ github.ref }}
-          echo isV3: ${{ github.ref == 'refs/heads/main' }}
+          echo isBeta: ${{ github.ref == 'refs/heads/beta' }}

.github/workflows/post-release-templates.yml

@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
-name: post-release-templates
-
-on:
-  release:
-    types:
-      - published
-  workflow_dispatch:
-
-env:
-  NODE_VERSION: 22.6.0
-  PNPM_VERSION: 9.7.1
-  DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
-  NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
-
-jobs:
-  wait_for_release:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    outputs:
-      release_tag: ${{ steps.determine_tag.outputs.release_tag }}
-    steps:
-      - name: Checkout
-        uses: actions/checkout@v4
-        with:
-          fetch-depth: 0
-          sparse-checkout: .github/workflows
-
-      - name: Determine Release Tag
-        id: determine_tag
-        run: |
-          if [ "${{ github.event_name }}" == "release" ]; then
-            echo "Using tag from release event: ${{ github.event.release.tag_name }}"
-            echo "release_tag=${{ github.event.release.tag_name }}" >> "$GITHUB_OUTPUT"
-          else
-            # pull latest tag from github, must match any version except v2. Should match v3, v4, v99, etc.
-            echo "Fetching latest tag from github..."
-            LATEST_TAG=$(git describe --tags --abbrev=0 --match 'v[0-9]*' --exclude 'v2*')
-            echo "Latest tag: $LATEST_TAG"
-            echo "release_tag=$LATEST_TAG" >> "$GITHUB_OUTPUT"
-          fi
-
-      - name: Wait until latest versions resolve on npm registry
-        run: |
-          ./.github/workflows/wait-until-package-version.sh payload ${{ steps.determine_tag.outputs.release_tag }}
-          ./.github/workflows/wait-until-package-version.sh @payloadcms/translations ${{ steps.determine_tag.outputs.release_tag }}
-          ./.github/workflows/wait-until-package-version.sh @payloadcms/next ${{ steps.determine_tag.outputs.release_tag }}
-
-  update_templates:
-    needs: wait_for_release
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    permissions:
-      contents: write
-      pull-requests: write
-    env:
-      POSTGRES_USER: postgres
-      POSTGRES_PASSWORD: postgres
-      POSTGRES_DB: payloadtests
-    steps:
-      - name: Checkout
-        uses: actions/checkout@v4
-
-      - name: Setup
-        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
-        with:
-          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
-          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
-
-      - name: Start PostgreSQL
-        uses: CasperWA/postgresql-action@v1.2
-        with:
-          postgresql version: '14' # See https://hub.docker.com/_/postgres for available versions
-          postgresql db: ${{ env.POSTGRES_DB }}
-          postgresql user: ${{ env.POSTGRES_USER }}
-          postgresql password: ${{ env.POSTGRES_PASSWORD }}
-
-      - name: Wait for PostgreSQL
-        run: sleep 30
-
-      - name: Configure PostgreSQL
-        run: |
-          psql "postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" -c "CREATE ROLE runner SUPERUSER LOGIN;"
-          psql "postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" -c "SELECT version();"
-          echo "POSTGRES_URL=postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" >> $GITHUB_ENV
-          echo "DATABASE_URI=postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" >> $GITHUB_ENV
-
-      - name: Start MongoDB
-        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.11.0
-        with:
-          mongodb-version: 6.0
-
-      - name: Update template lockfiles and migrations
-        run: pnpm script:gen-templates
-
-      - name: Commit and push changes
-        id: commit
-        env:
-          GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
-        run: |
-          set -ex
-          git config --global user.name "github-actions[bot]"
-          git config --global user.email "github-actions[bot]@users.noreply.github.com"
-
-          git diff --name-only
-
-          export BRANCH_NAME=templates/bump-${{ needs.wait_for_release.outputs.release_tag }}-$(date +%s)
-          echo "branch=$BRANCH_NAME" >> "$GITHUB_OUTPUT"
-
-      - name: Create pull request
-        uses: peter-evans/create-pull-request@v7
-        with:
-          token: ${{ secrets.GH_TOKEN_POST_RELEASE_TEMPLATES }}
-          labels: 'area: templates'
-          author: github-actions[bot] <github-actions[bot]@users.noreply.github.com>
-          commit-message: 'templates: bump templates for ${{ needs.wait_for_release.outputs.release_tag }}'
-          branch: ${{ steps.commit.outputs.branch }}
-          base: main
-          assignees: ${{ github.actor }}
-          title: 'templates: bump for ${{ needs.wait_for_release.outputs.release_tag }}'
-          body: |
-            🤖 Automated bump of templates for ${{ needs.wait_for_release.outputs.release_tag }}
-
-            Triggered by user: @${{ github.actor }}

.github/workflows/post-release.yml

@@ -5,24 +5,16 @@ on:
     types:
       - published
   workflow_dispatch:
-    inputs:
-      tag:
-        description: 'Release tag to process (optional)'
-        required: false
-        default: ''
-
-env:
-  NODE_VERSION: 22.6.0
-  PNPM_VERSION: 9.7.1
-  DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
-  NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
 
 jobs:
   post_release:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    if: ${{ github.event_name != 'workflow_dispatch' }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 0
+          # Only needed if debugging on a branch other than default
+          # ref: ${{ github.event.release.target_commitish || github.ref }}
       - uses: ./.github/actions/release-commenter
         continue-on-error: true
         env:
@@ -36,17 +28,3 @@ jobs:
 
           comment-template: |
             🚀 This is included in version {release_link}
-
-  github-releases-to-discord:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
-    if: ${{ github.event_name != 'workflow_dispatch' }}
-    steps:
-      - name: Checkout
-        uses: actions/checkout@v4
-      - name: Github Releases To Discord
-        uses: SethCohen/github-releases-to-discord@v1.16.2
-        with:
-          webhook_url: ${{ secrets.DISCORD_RELEASES_WEBHOOK_URL }}
-          color: '16777215'
-          username: 'Payload Releases'
-          avatar_url: 'https://l4wlsi8vxy8hre4v.public.blob.vercel-storage.com/discord-bot-logo.png'

.github/workflows/pr-title.yml

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 name: pr-title
 
 on:
-  pull_request_target:
+  pull_request:
     types:
       - opened
       - edited
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ permissions:
 jobs:
   main:
     name: lint-pr-title
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - uses: amannn/action-semantic-pull-request@v5
         id: lint_pr_title
@@ -24,15 +24,14 @@ jobs:
             chore
             ci
             docs
-            examples
             feat
             fix
             perf
             refactor
             revert
             style
-            templates
             test
+            types
           scopes: |
             cpa
             db-\*
@@ -41,9 +40,7 @@ jobs:
             db-vercel-postgres
             db-sqlite
             drizzle
-            email-\*
             email-nodemailer
-            email-resend
             eslint
             graphql
             live-preview
@@ -109,11 +106,16 @@ jobs:
 
   label-pr-on-open:
     name: label-pr-on-open
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     if: github.event.action == 'opened'
     steps:
-      - name: Tag with 2.x branch with v2
-        if: github.event.pull_request.base.ref == '2.x'
+      - name: Tag with main branch with v2
+        if: github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'main'
         uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
         with:
           labels: v2
+      - name: Tag with beta branch with v3
+        if: github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'beta'
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: v3

.github/workflows/release-canary.yml

@@ -2,6 +2,8 @@ name: release-canary
 
 on:
   workflow_dispatch:
+    branches:
+      - beta
 
 env:
   NODE_VERSION: 22.6.0
@@ -11,10 +13,9 @@ env:
 
 jobs:
   release:
-    name: release-canary-${{ github.ref_name }}-${{ github.sha }}
     permissions:
       id-token: write
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - name: Checkout
         uses: actions/checkout@v4

.github/workflows/stale.yml

@@ -1,21 +1,11 @@
 name: stale
 
 on:
-  schedule:
-    # Run nightly at 1am EST
-    - cron: '0 5 * * *'
-
   workflow_dispatch:
-    inputs:
-      dry-run:
-        description: Run the stale action in debug-only mode
-        default: false
-        required: false
-        type: boolean
 
 jobs:
   stale:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     permissions:
       issues: write
       pull-requests: write
@@ -23,29 +13,30 @@ jobs:
       - uses: actions/stale@v9
         id: stale
         with:
-          debug-only: ${{ inputs.dry-run || false }}
-
-          days-before-stale: 30
-          days-before-close: -1 # Disable closing
+          debug-only: true
+          days-before-stale: 90
+          days-before-close: 7
           ascending: true
           operations-per-run: 300
-          exempt-all-assignees: true
+
+          # Ignore all assigned
+          exempt-all-assignees: false
 
           # Issues
-          stale-issue-label: stale
-          exempt-issue-labels: 'prioritized,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor,status: verified'
-          stale-issue-message: ''
-
-          close-issue-message: |
+          stale-issue-label: 'stale'
+          exempt-issue-labels: 'blocked,must,should,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor'
+          stale-issue-message: >
+            This issue has been marked as stale due to lack of activity. To keep the ticket open, please indicate that it is still relevant in a comment below.
+          close-issue-message: >
             This issue was automatically closed due to lack of activity.
 
           # Pull Requests
-          stale-pr-label: stale
-          exempt-pr-labels: 'prioritized,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor'
-          stale-pr-message: ''
-          close-pr-message: |
+          stale-pr-label: 'stale'
+          exempt-pr-labels: 'blocked,must,should,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor'
+          stale-pr-message: >
+            This PR is stale due to lack of activity. To keep the PR open, please indicate that it is still relevant in a comment below.
+          close-pr-message: >
             This pull request was automatically closed due to lack of activity.
 
-      # TODO: Add a step to notify team
       - name: Print outputs
         run: echo ${{ format('{0},{1}', toJSON(steps.stale.outputs.staled-issues-prs), toJSON(steps.stale.outputs.closed-issues-prs)) }}

.github/workflows/triage.yml

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 name: triage
 
 on:
-  pull_request_target:
+  pull_request:
     types:
       - opened
   issues:
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ permissions:
 
 jobs:
   debug-context:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - name: View context attributes
         uses: actions/github-script@v7
@@ -27,10 +27,11 @@ jobs:
 
   label-created-by:
     name: label-on-open
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - name: Tag with 'created-by'
         uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        if: github.event.action == 'opened'
         with:
           github-token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
           script: |
@@ -88,11 +89,10 @@ jobs:
   triage:
     name: initial-triage
     if: github.event_name == 'issues'
-    runs-on: ubuntu-24.04
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
         with:
-          ref: ${{ github.event.pull_request.base.ref }}
           token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
       - uses: ./.github/actions/triage
         with:

.github/workflows/wait-until-package-version.sh

@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/bash
-
-if [[ "$#" -ne 2 ]]; then
-  echo "Usage: $0 <package-name> <version>"
-  exit 1
-fi
-
-PACKAGE_NAME="$1"
-TARGET_VERSION=${2#v} # Git tag has leading 'v', npm version does not
-TIMEOUT=300  # 5 minutes in seconds
-INTERVAL=10  # 10 seconds
-ELAPSED=0
-
-echo "Waiting for version ${TARGET_VERSION} of '${PACKAGE_NAME}' to resolve... (timeout: ${TIMEOUT} seconds)"
-
-while [[ ${ELAPSED} -lt ${TIMEOUT} ]]; do
-  latest_version=$(npm show "${PACKAGE_NAME}" version 2>/dev/null)
-
-  if [[ ${latest_version} == "${TARGET_VERSION}" ]]; then
-    echo "SUCCCESS: Version ${TARGET_VERSION} of ${PACKAGE_NAME} is available."
-    exit 0
-  else
-    echo "Version ${TARGET_VERSION} of ${PACKAGE_NAME} is not available yet. Retrying in ${INTERVAL} seconds... (elapsed: ${ELAPSED}s)"
-  fi
-
-  sleep "${INTERVAL}"
-  ELAPSED=$((ELAPSED + INTERVAL))
-done
-
-echo "Timed out after ${TIMEOUT} seconds waiting for version ${TARGET_VERSION} of '${PACKAGE_NAME}' to resolve."
-exit 1

ISSUE_GUIDE.md

@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ There are a couple ways to do this:
 
 - **Granularly** - you can run individual tests in vscode by installing the Jest Runner plugin and using that to run individual tests. Clicking the `debug` button will run the test in debug mode allowing you to set break points.
 
-  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/assets/images/github/int-debug.png" />
+  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/src/admin/assets/images/github/int-debug.png" />
 
 - **Manually** - you can run all int tests in the `/test/_community/int.spec.ts` file by running the following command:
 
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The easiest way to run E2E tests is to install
 
 Once they are installed you can open the `testing` tab in vscode sidebar and drill down to the test you want to run, i.e. `/test/_community/e2e.spec.ts`
 
-<img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/packages/payload/src/assets/images/github/e2e-debug.png" />
+<img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/payloadcms/payload/main/src/admin/assets/images/github/e2e-debug.png" />
 
 #### Notes
 

README.md

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<a href="https://payloadcms.com"><img width="100%" src="https://l4wlsi8vxy8hre4v.public.blob.vercel-storage.com/github-banner-new-logo.jpg" alt="Payload headless CMS Admin panel built with React" /></a>
+<a href="https://payloadcms.com"><img width="100%" src="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/payload/src/assets/images/github-banner-nextjs-native.jpg" alt="Payload headless CMS Admin panel built with React" /></a>
 <br />
 <br />
 
@@ -9,20 +9,18 @@
   &nbsp;
   <a href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/payload"><img alt="npm" src="https://img.shields.io/npm/dw/payload?style=flat-square" /></a>
   &nbsp;
-  <a href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/graphs/contributors"><img alt="npm" src="https://img.shields.io/github/contributors-anon/payloadcms/payload?color=yellow&style=flat-square" /></a>
-  &nbsp;
   <a href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/payload"><img alt="npm" src="https://img.shields.io/npm/v/payload?style=flat-square" /></a>
   &nbsp;
   <a href="https://twitter.com/payloadcms"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/follow-payloadcms-1DA1F2?logo=twitter&style=flat-square" alt="Payload Twitter" /></a>
 </p>
 <hr/>
 <h4>
-<a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/docs/getting-started/what-is-payload" rel="dofollow"><strong>Explore the Docs</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/community-help" rel="dofollow"><strong>Community Help</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions/1539" rel="dofollow"><strong>Roadmap</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://www.g2.com/products/payload-cms/reviews#reviews" rel="dofollow"><strong>View G2 Reviews</strong></a>
+<a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/getting-started/what-is-payload" rel="dofollow"><strong>Explore the Docs</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/community-help" rel="dofollow"><strong>Community Help</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions/1539" rel="dofollow"><strong>Roadmap</strong></a>&nbsp;·&nbsp;<a target="_blank" href="https://www.g2.com/products/payload-cms/reviews#reviews" rel="dofollow"><strong>View G2 Reviews</strong></a>
 </h4>
 <hr/>
 
 > [!IMPORTANT]
-> 🎉 <strong>We've released 3.0!</strong> Star this repo or keep an eye on it to follow along.
+> 🚨 <strong>We're about to release 3.0 stable.</strong> Star this repo or keep an eye on it to follow along.
 
 Payload is the first-ever Next.js native CMS that can install directly in your existing `/app` folder. It's the start of a new era for headless CMS.
 
@@ -40,25 +38,25 @@ Payload is the first-ever Next.js native CMS that can install directly in your e
 
 ## Quickstart
 
-Before beginning to work with Payload, make sure you have all of the [required software](https://payloadcms.com/docs/getting-started/installation).
+Before beginning to work with Payload, make sure you have all of the [required software](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/getting-started/installation).
 
 ```text
-pnpx create-payload-app@latest
+pnpx create-payload-app@beta
 ```
 
-**If you're new to Payload, you should start with the website template** (`pnpx create-payload-app@latest -t website`). It shows how to do _everything_ - including custom Rich Text blocks, on-demand revalidation, live preview, and more. It comes with a frontend built with Tailwind all in one `/app` folder.
+**If you're new to Payload, you should start with the 3.0 beta website template** (`pnpx create-payload-app@beta -t website`). It shows how to do _everything_ - including custom Rich Text blocks, on-demand revalidation, live preview, and more. It comes with a frontend built with Tailwind all in one `/app` folder.
 
 ## One-click templates
 
 Jumpstart your next project by starting with a pre-made template. These are production-ready, end-to-end solutions designed to get you to market as fast as possible.
 
-### [🌐 Website](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/website)
+### [🌐 Website](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/website)
 
 Build any kind of website, blog, or portfolio from small to enterprise. Comes with a fully functional front-end built with RSCs and Tailwind.
 
-We're constantly adding more templates to our [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates). If you maintain your own template, consider adding the `payload-template` topic to your GitHub repository for others to find.
+We're constantly adding more templates to our [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates). If you maintain your own template, consider adding the `payload-template` topic to your GitHub repository for others to find.
 
-- [Official Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates)
+- [Official Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates)
 - [Community Templates](https://github.com/topics/payload-template)
 
 ## ✨ Features
@@ -68,15 +66,15 @@ We're constantly adding more templates to our [Templates Directory](https://gith
 - Use server components to extend Payload UI
 - Query your database directly in server components, no need for REST / GraphQL
 - Fully TypeScript with automatic types for your data
-- [Auth out of the box](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/overview)
-- [Versions and drafts](https://payloadcms.com/docs/versions/overview)
-- [Localization](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/localization)
-- [Block-based layout builder](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/blocks)
-- [Customizable React admin](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/overview)
-- [Lexical rich text editor](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/rich-text)
-- [Conditional field logic](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/overview#conditional-logic)
-- Extremely granular [Access Control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/access-control/overview)
-- [Document and field-level hooks](https://payloadcms.com/docs/hooks/overview) for every action Payload provides
+- [Auth out of the box](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/authentication/overview)
+- [Versions and drafts](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/versions/overview)
+- [Localization](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/configuration/localization)
+- [Block-based kayout builder](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/fields/blocks)
+- [Customizable React admin](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/admin/overview)
+- [Lexical rich text editor](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/fields/rich-text)
+- [Conditional field logic](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/fields/overview#conditional-logic)
+- Extremely granular [Access Control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/access-control/overview)
+- [Document and field-level hooks](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/hooks/overview) for every action Payload provides
 - Intensely fast API
 - Highly secure thanks to HTTP-only cookies, CSRF protection, and more
 
@@ -84,9 +82,9 @@ We're constantly adding more templates to our [Templates Directory](https://gith
 
 ## 🗒️ Documentation
 
-Check out the [Payload website](https://payloadcms.com/docs/getting-started/what-is-payload) to find in-depth documentation for everything that Payload offers.
+Check out the [Payload website](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/getting-started/what-is-payload) to find in-depth documentation for everything that Payload offers.
 
-Migrating from v2 to v3? Check out the [3.0 Migration Guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/docs/migration-guide/overview.mdx) on how to do it.
+Migrating from v1 to v2? Check out the [2.0 Release Notes](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/releases/tag/v2.0.0) on how to do it.
 
 ## 🙋 Contributing
 
@@ -96,11 +94,7 @@ If you want to add contributions to this repository, please follow the instructi
 
 The [Examples Directory](./examples) is a great resource for learning how to setup Payload in a variety of different ways, but you can also find great examples in our blog and throughout our social media.
 
-If you'd like to run the examples, you can use `create-payload-app` to create a project from one:
-
-```sh
-npx create-payload-app --example example_name
-```
+If you'd like to run the examples, you can either copy them to a folder outside this repo or run them directly by (1) navigating to the example's subfolder (`cd examples/your-example-folder`) and (2) using the `--ignore-workspace` flag to bypass workspace restrictions (e.g., `pnpm --ignore-workspace install` or `pnpm --ignore-workspace dev`).
 
 You can see more examples at:
 

docs/access-control/collections.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: With Collection-level Access Control you can define which users can create
 keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control/overview) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../getting-started/concepts#collections), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
+Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../collections/overview), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
 
 To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
 
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ If a Collection supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additio
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `create` request.
 
-To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `create` function:
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `read` request.
 
-To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ export const CollectionWithReadAccess: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `update` request.
 
-To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ export const CollectionWithUpdateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
 
 Similarly to the Update function, returns a boolean or a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit which documents can be deleted by which users.
 
-To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -252,14 +252,14 @@ export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
 
 The following arguments are provided to the `delete` function:
 
-| Option    | Description                                                                                                                                            |
-| --------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user. |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.                                                                                                                  |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.
 
 ### Admin
 
-If the Collection is used to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
+If the Collection is use to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
 
 To add Admin Access Control to a Collection, use the `admin` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
@@ -286,9 +286,9 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `admin` function:
 
 ### Unlock
 
-Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/overview#config-options).
+Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/overview#options).
 
-To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `unlock` function:
 
 If the Collection has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
 
-To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'

docs/access-control/fields.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Field-level Access Control is specified within a field's config, and allow
 keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control/overview) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
+Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
 
 To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ export const FieldWithAccessControl: Field = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Field Access Controls does not support returning [Query](../queries/overview) constraints like [Collection Access Control](./collections) does.
 </Banner>
 

docs/access-control/globals.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Global-level Access Control is specified within each Global's `access` pro
 keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control/overview) used to restrict access to [Global](../configuration/globals) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
+Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to [Global](../globals/overview) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
 
 To add Access Control to a Global, use the `access` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
 
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ export const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
 
 Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
 
-To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ If a Global supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional
 
 Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
 
-To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
 
 Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
 
-To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
 
 If the Global has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
 
-To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'

docs/access-control/overview.mdx

@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ There are three main types of Access Control in Payload:
 
 ## Default Access Control
 
-Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication/overview) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
+Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
 
 Here is the default Access Control that Payload provides:
 
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ const defaultPayloadAccess = ({ req: { user } }) => {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   In the [Local API](../local-api/overview), all Access Control is _skipped_ by default. This allows your server to have full control over your application. To opt back in, you can set the `overrideAccess` option to `false` in your requests.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ The Admin Panel responds dynamically to your changes to Access Control. For exam
 To accomplish this, Payload exposes the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access). Upon login, Payload executes each Access Control function at the top level, across all Collections, Globals, and Fields, and returns a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do within your application.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   When your access control functions are executed via the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access),  the `id` and `data` arguments will be `undefined`. This is because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific Document.
 </Banner>
 

docs/admin/collections.mdx

@@ -25,24 +25,24 @@ export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| -------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**                      | Text or localization object used to group Collection and Global links in the admin navigation. Set to `false` to hide the link from the navigation while keeping its routes accessible.                                      |
-| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                                        |
-| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](../hooks/collections).                                                                                                                                              |
-| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin Panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title. A field with `virtual: true` cannot be used as the title.             |
+| Option                           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                                             |
+| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                                 |
+| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](../hooks/collections).                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin Panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title. A field with `virtual: true` cannot be used as the title.      |
 | **`description`**                | Text to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information. Alternatively, you can use the `admin.components.Description` to render a React component. [More details](#custom-components). |
-| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.                                   |
-| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.                           |
-| **`meta`**                       | Page metadata overrides to apply to this Collection within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                                                                      |
-| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the Admin Panel that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                               |
-| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                                                |
+| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                                              |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.                            |
+| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.                    |
+| **`meta`**                       | Page metadata overrides to apply to this Collection within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                                                               |
+| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the Admin Panel that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                        |
+| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                                         |
 | **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](#custom-components).                                                                                                                     |
-| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                                    |
-| **`pagination`**                 | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`baseListFilter`**             | You can define a default base filter for this collection's List view, which will be merged into any filters that the user performs.                                                                                          |
+| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                             |
+| **`pagination`**                 | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`baseListFilter`**             | You can define a default base filter for this collection's List view, which will be merged into any filters that the user performs.                                                                                   |
 
 ### Custom Components
 
@@ -65,21 +65,21 @@ export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Path                       | Description                                                                                                                                |
-| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                                           |
-| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                                   |
-| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                                            |
-| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table                                                                    |
-| **`Description`**          | A component to render below the Collection label in the List View. An alternative to the `admin.description` property.                     |
-| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                    |
+| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
+| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
+| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
+| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
+| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table
+| **`Description`**          | A component to render below the Collection label in the List View. An alternative to the `admin.description` property. |
+| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                     |
 | **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
 | **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                           |
-| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                                              |
+| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -108,23 +108,15 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-The `preview` property resolves to a string that points to your front-end application with additional URL parameters. This can be an absolute URL or a relative path.
-
 The preview function receives two arguments:
 
 | Argument | Description |
 | --- | --- |
 | **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale`, `token`, and `req` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-If your application requires a fully qualified URL, such as within deploying to Vercel Preview Deployments, you can use the `req` property to build this URL:
-
-```ts
-preview: (doc, { req }) => `${req.protocol}//${req.host}/${doc.slug}` // highlight-line
-```
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -177,6 +169,6 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
 </Banner>

docs/admin/components.mdx

@@ -8,10 +8,10 @@ keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, c
 
 The Payload [Admin Panel](./overview) is designed to be as minimal and straightforward as possible to allow for easy customization and full control over the UI. In order for Payload to support this level of customization, Payload provides a pattern for you to supply your own React components through your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview).
 
-All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default. This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api/overview) directly on the front-end. Custom Components are available for nearly every part of the Admin Panel for extreme granularity and control.
+All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default, with the exception of [Custom Providers](#custom-providers). This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api/overview) directly on the front-end. Custom Components are available for nearly every part of the Admin Panel for extreme granularity and control.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Client Components continue to be fully supported. To use Client Components in your app, simply include the `use client` directive. Payload will automatically detect and remove all default, [non-serializable props](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/use-client#serializable-types) before rendering your component. [More details](#client-components).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   All Custom Components can be either Server Components or Client Components, depending on the presence of the `use client` directive at the top of the file.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ The Import Map is automatically regenerated at startup and whenever Hot Module R
 
 If needed, custom items can be appended onto the Import Map. This is mostly only relevant for plugin authors who need to add a custom import that is not referenced in a known location.
 
-To add a custom import to the Import Map, use the `admin.dependencies` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+To add a custom import to the Import Map, use the `admin.dependencies` property in your [Payload Config](../getting-started/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Building Custom Components
 
-All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default. This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api/overview) directly on the front-end, among other things.
+All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default, with the exception of [Custom Providers](#custom-providers). This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api/overview) directly on the front-end, among other things.
 
 ### Default Props
 
@@ -184,8 +184,8 @@ Each Custom Component receives the following props by default:
 | `i18n`                    | The [i18n](../configuration/i18n) object.                                                                           |
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
-  All Custom Components also receive various other props that are specific component being rendered. See [Root Components](#root-components), [Collection Components](./collections#custom-components), [Global Components](./globals#custom-components), or [Field Components](./fields#custom-components) for a complete list of all default props per component.
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All Custom Components also receive various other props that are specific component being rendered. See [Root Components](#root-components), [Collection Components](#collection-components), [Global Components](#global-components), or [Field Components](#custom-field-components) for a complete list of all default props per component.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Custom Props
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ export const MyClientComponent: React.FC = () => {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   Client Components cannot be passed [non-serializable props](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/use-client#serializable-types). If you are rendering your Client Component _from within_ a Server Component, ensure that its props are serializable.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Then to colorize your Custom Component's background, for example, you can use th
 Payload also exports its [SCSS](https://sass-lang.com) library for reuse which includes mixins, etc. To use this, simply import it as follows into your `.scss` file:
 
 ```scss
-@import '~@payloadcms/ui/scss';
+@import '~payload/scss';
 
 .my-component {
   @include mid-break {
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ Payload also exports its [SCSS](https://sass-lang.com) library for reuse which i
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   You can also drill into Payload's own component styles, or easily apply global, app-wide CSS. More on that [here](./customizing-css).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ Payload also exports its [SCSS](https://sass-lang.com) library for reuse which i
 
 Root Components are those that effect the [Admin Panel](./overview) generally, such as the logo or the main nav.
 
-To override Root Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+To override Root Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Payload Config](../getting-started/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                                                                                                                 |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   You can also use set [Collection Components](./collections#custom-components) and [Global Components](./globals#custom-components) in their respective configs.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -546,5 +546,5 @@ export const useMyCustomContext = () => useContext(MyCustomContext)
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**React Context exists only within Client Components. This means they must include the `use client` directive at the top of their files and cannot contain server-only code. To use a Server Component here, simply _wrap_ your Client Component with it.
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong> Custom Providers are by definition Client Components. This means they must include the `use client` directive at the top of their files and cannot use server-only code.
 </Banner>

docs/admin/customizing-css.mdx

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headl
 
 Customizing the Payload [Admin Panel](./overview) through CSS alone is one of the easiest and most powerful ways to customize the look and feel of the dashboard. To allow for this level of customization, Payload:
 
-1. Exposes a [root-level stylesheet](#global-css) for you to inject custom selectors
+1. Exposes a [root-level stylesheet](#global-css) for you to easily to inject custom selectors
 1. Provides a [CSS library](#css-library) that can be easily overridden or extended
 1. Uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com) so that class names are globally accessible
 
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Here is an example of how you might target the Dashboard View and change the bac
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-  If you are building [Custom Components](./components), it is best to import your own stylesheets directly into your components, rather than using the global stylesheet. You can continue to use the [CSS library](#css-library) as needed.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you are building [Custom Components](./overview), it is best to import your own stylesheets directly into your components, rather than using the global stylesheet. You can continue to use the [CSS library](#css-library) as needed.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Specificity rules
@@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ You can also override Payload's built-in [CSS Variables](https://developer.mozil
 
 The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
 
-- [Breakpoints](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss/queries.scss)
-- [Colors](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss/colors.scss)
+- [Breakpoints](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/queries.scss)
+- [Colors](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/colors.scss)
   - Base color shades (white to black by default)
   - Success / warning / error color shades
   - Theme-specific colors (background, input background, text color, etc.)
   - Elevation colors (used to determine how "bright" something should be when compared to the background)
-- [Sizing](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss/app.scss)
+- [Sizing](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/app.scss)
   - Horizontal gutter
   - Transition speeds
   - Font sizes
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
 For an up-to-date, comprehensive list of all available variables, please refer to the [Source Code](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Warning:**
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
   If you're overriding colors or theme elevations, make sure to consider how [your changes will affect dark mode](#dark-mode).
 </Banner>
 

docs/admin/fields.mdx

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ keywords:
 For example, your app might need to render a specific interface that Payload does not inherently support, such as a color picker. To do this, you could replace the default [Text Field](../fields/text) input with your own user-friendly component that formats the data into a valid color value.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Don't see a built-in field type that you need? Build it! Using a combination of [Field Validations](../fields/overview#validation)
   and [Custom Components](./components), you can override the entirety of how a component functions within the [Admin Panel](./overview) to effectively create your own field type.
 </Banner>
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`style`**             | [CSS Properties](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS) to inject into the root element of the field.                                                                                                                 |
 | **`className`**         | Attach a [CSS class attribute](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Class_selectors) to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                             |
 | **`readOnly`**          | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
-| **`disabled`**          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) entirely.                                                                                                                           |
+| **`disabled`**          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`disableBulkEdit`**   | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents. Defaults to `true` for UI fields.                                                               |
 | **`disableListColumn`** | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view column selector.                                                                                                                             |
 | **`disableListFilter`** | Set `disableListFilter` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view filter options.                                                                                                                              |
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ A description can be configured in three ways:
   - As a function which returns a string. [More details](#description-functions).
   - As a React component. [More details](#description).
 
-To add a Custom Description to a field, use the `admin.description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily add a Custom Description to a field, use the `admin.description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   To replace the Field Description with a [Custom Component](./components), use the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#description).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 
 Custom Descriptions can also be defined as a function. Description Functions are executed on the server and can be used to format simple descriptions based on the user's current [Locale](../configuration/localization).
 
-To add a Description Function to a field, set the `admin.description` property to a _function_ in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily add a Description Function to a field, set the `admin.description` property to a _function_ in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -121,11 +121,6 @@ All Description Functions receive the following arguments:
 | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`t`**        | The `t` function used to internationalize the Admin Panel. [More details](../configuration/i18n) |
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
-  If you need to subscribe to live updates within your form, use a Description Component instead. [More details](#description).
-</Banner>
-
 ## Conditional Logic
 
 You can show and hide fields based on what other fields are doing by utilizing conditional logic on a field by field basis. The `condition` property on a field's admin config accepts a function which takes three arguments:
@@ -173,7 +168,7 @@ Within the [Admin Panel](./overview), fields are represented in three distinct p
 - [Cell](#cell) - The table cell component rendered in the List View.
 - [Filter](#filter) - The filter component rendered in the List View.
 
-To swap in Field Components with your own, use the `admin.components` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily swap in Field Components with your own, use the `admin.components` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -211,7 +206,7 @@ The following options are available:
 
 The Field Component is the actual form field rendered in the Edit View. This is the input that user's will interact with when editing a document.
 
-To swap in your own Field Component, use the `admin.components.Field` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily swap in your own Field Component, use the `admin.components.Field` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -242,31 +237,31 @@ _For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components]
 
 All Field Components receive the following props by default:
 
-| Property             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the [Preferences](./preferences) for the document.                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`field`**          | In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. Server Components will also receive the sanitized field config through the`clientField` prop (see below). |
-| **`locale`**         | The locale of the field. [More details](../configuration/localization).                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`readOnly`**       | A boolean value that represents if the field is read-only or not.                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`user`**           | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**       | A function that can be used to validate the field.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`path`**           | A string representing the direct, dynamic path to the field at runtime, i.e. `myGroup.myArray.0.myField`.                                                                                                                           |
-| **`schemaPath`**     | A string representing the direct, static path to the [Field Config](../fields/overview), i.e. `posts.myGroup.myArray.myField`.                                                                                                      |
-| **`indexPath`**      | A hyphen-notated string representing the path to the field _within the nearest named ancestor field_, i.e. `0-0`                                                                                                                    |
+| Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the [Preferences](./preferences) for the document.
+| **`field`** | In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. Server Components will also receive the sanitized field config through the`clientField` prop (see below). |
+| **`locale`**     | The locale of the field. [More details](../configuration/localization).                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`readOnly`**   | A boolean value that represents if the field is read-only or not.                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`user`**       | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
+| **`validate`**   | A function that can be used to validate the field.                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`path`**       | A string representing the direct, dynamic path to the field at runtime, i.e. `myGroup.myArray.0.myField`. |
+| **`schemaPath`** | A string representing the direct, static path to the [Field Config](../fields/overview), i.e. `posts.myGroup.myArray.myField`. |
+| **`indexPath`**  | A hyphen-notated string representing the path to the field _within the nearest named ancestor field_, i.e. `0-0` |
 
 In addition to the above props, all Server Components will also receive the following props:
 
-| Property          | Description                                                                   |
-| ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`clientField`** | The serializable Client Field Config.                                         |
-| **`field`**       | The Field Config. [More details](../fields/overview).                         |
-| **`data`**        | The current document being edited.                                            |
-| **`i18n`**        | The [i18n](../configuration/i18n) object.                                     |
-| **`payload`**     | The [Payload](../local-api/overview) class.                                   |
-| **`permissions`** | The field permissions based on the currently authenticated user.              |
-| **`siblingData`** | The data of the field's siblings.                                             |
-| **`user`**        | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
-| **`value`**       | The value of the field at render-time.                                        |
+| Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`clientField`** | The serializable Client Field Config. |
+| **`field`** | The Field Config. [More details](../fields/overview). |
+| **`data`**       | The current document being edited.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`i18n`**       | The [i18n](../configuration/i18n) object.
+| **`payload`**    | The [Payload](../local-api/overview) class.                                                           |
+| **`permissions`** | The field permissions based on the currently authenticated user.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`siblingData`** | The data of the field's siblings.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`user`**       | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
+| **`value`**      | The value of the field at render-time.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 
 #### Sending and receiving values from the form
 
@@ -312,7 +307,7 @@ import type {
 
 The Cell Component is rendered in the table of the List View. It represents the value of the field when displayed in a table cell.
 
-To swap in your own Cell Component, use the `admin.components.Cell` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily swap in your own Cell Component, use the `admin.components.Cell` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload'
@@ -337,35 +332,11 @@ All Cell Components receive the same [Default Field Component Props](#field), pl
 
 For details on how to build Custom Components themselves, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
 
-### Filter
-
-The Filter Component is the actual input element rendered within the "Filter By" dropdown of the List View used to represent this field when building filters.
-
-To swap in your own Filter Component, use the `admin.components.Filter` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const myField: Field = {
-  name: 'myField',
-  type: 'text',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      Filter: '/path/to/MyCustomFilterComponent', // highlight-line
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-All Custom Filter Components receive the same [Default Field Component Props](#field).
-
-For details on how to build Custom Components themselves, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
-
 ### Label
 
 The Label Component is rendered anywhere a field needs to be represented by a label. This is typically used in the Edit View, but can also be used in the List View and elsewhere.
 
-To swap in your own Label Component, use the `admin.components.Label` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily swap in your own Label Component, use the `admin.components.Label` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload'
@@ -399,9 +370,9 @@ import type {
 
 ### Description
 
-Alternatively to the [Description Property](#field-descriptions), you can also use a [Custom Component](./components) as the Field Description. This can be useful when you need to provide more complex feedback to the user, such as rendering dynamic field values or other interactive elements.
+Alternatively to the [Description Property](#the-description-property), you can also use a [Custom Component](./components) as the Field Description. This can be useful when you need to provide more complex feedback to the user, such as rendering dynamic field values or other interactive elements.
 
-To add a Description Component to a field, use the `admin.components.Description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily add a Description Component to a field, use the `admin.components.Description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -443,7 +414,7 @@ import type {
 
 The Error Component is rendered when a field fails validation. It is typically displayed beneath the field input in a visually-compelling style.
 
-To swap in your own Error Component, use the `admin.components.Error` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+To easily swap in your own Error Component, use the `admin.components.Error` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload'

docs/admin/globals.mdx

@@ -25,9 +25,9 @@ export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                       |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**       | Text or localization object used to group Collection and Global links in the admin navigation. Set to `false` to hide the link from the navigation while keeping its routes accessible. |
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
+| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
 | **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
 | **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](#custom-components).                           |
 | **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin Panel for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -102,6 +102,6 @@ The preview function receives two arguments:
 | **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
 </Banner>

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, c
 Payload provides a variety of powerful [React Hooks](https://react.dev/reference/react-dom/hooks) that can be used within your own [Custom Components](./components), such as [Custom Fields](./fields). With them, you can interface with Payload itself to build just about any type of complex customization you can think of.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   All Custom Components are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default. Hooks, on the other hand, are only available in client-side environments. To use hooks, [ensure your component is a client component](./components#client-components).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -21,11 +21,10 @@ To do so, import the `useField` hook as follows:
 
 ```tsx
 'use client'
-import type { TextFieldClientComponent } from 'payload'
 import { useField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
-export const CustomTextField: TextFieldClientComponent = ({ path }) => {
-  const { value, setValue } = useField({ path }) // highlight-line
+const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
+  const { value, setValue, path } = useField() // highlight-line
 
   return (
     <div>
@@ -78,7 +77,7 @@ type FieldType<T> = {
 There are times when a custom field component needs to have access to data from other fields, and you have a few options to do so. The `useFormFields` hook is a powerful and highly performant way to retrieve a form's field state, as well as to retrieve the `dispatchFields` method, which can be helpful for setting other fields' form states from anywhere within a form.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **This hook is great for retrieving only certain fields from form state** because it
+  <strong>This hook is great for retrieving only certain fields from form state</strong> because it
   ensures that it will only cause a rerender when the items that you ask for change.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -150,15 +149,15 @@ You can send the following actions to the `dispatchFields` function.
 | **`REPLACE_STATE`**    | Completely replaces form state                                             |
 | **`UPDATE`**           | Update any property of a specific field's state                            |
 
-To see types for each action supported within the `dispatchFields` hook, check out the Form types [here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/forms/Form/types.ts).
+To see types for each action supported within the `dispatchFields` hook, check out the Form types [here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/components/forms/Form/types.ts).
 
 ## useForm
 
 The `useForm` hook can be used to interact with the form itself, and sends back many methods that can be used to reactively fetch form state without causing rerenders within your components each time a field is changed. This is useful if you have action-based callbacks that your components fire, and need to interact with form state _based on a user action_.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Warning:**
-
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  <br />
   This hook is optimized to avoid causing rerenders when fields change, and as such, its `fields`
   property will be out of date. You should only leverage this hook if you need to perform actions
   against the form in response to your users' actions. Do not rely on its returned "fields" as being
@@ -176,7 +175,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
   rows={[
     [
       {
-        value: "**`fields`**",
+        value: <strong><code>fields</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Deprecated. This property cannot be relied on as up-to-date.",
@@ -187,7 +186,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`submit`**",
+        value: <strong><code>submit</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Method to trigger the form to submit",
@@ -198,7 +197,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`dispatchFields`**",
+        value: <strong><code>dispatchFields</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Dispatch actions to the form field state",
@@ -209,7 +208,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`validateForm`**",
+        value: <strong><code>validateForm</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Trigger a validation of the form state",
@@ -220,10 +219,10 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`createFormData`**",
+        value: <strong><code>createFormData</code></strong>,
       },
       {
-        value: "Create a `multipart/form-data` object from the current form's state",
+        value: <>Create a <code>multipart/form-data</code> object from the current form's state</>,
       },
       {
         value: ''
@@ -231,7 +230,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`disabled`**",
+        value: <strong><code>disabled</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Boolean denoting whether or not the form is disabled",
@@ -242,7 +241,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`getFields`**",
+        value: <strong><code>getFields</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'Gets all fields from state',
@@ -253,7 +252,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`getField`**",
+        value: <strong><code>getField</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'Gets a single field from state by path',
@@ -264,7 +263,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`getData`**",
+        value: <strong><code>getData</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'Returns the data stored in the form',
@@ -275,7 +274,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`getSiblingData`**",
+        value: <strong><code>getSiblingData</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'Returns form sibling data for the given field path',
@@ -286,10 +285,10 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`setModified`**",
+        value: <strong><code>setModified</code></strong>,
       },
       {
-        value: "Set the form\'s `modified` state",
+        value: <>Set the form\'s <code>modified</code> state</>,
       },
       {
         value: '',
@@ -297,10 +296,10 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`setProcessing`**",
+        value: <strong><code>setProcessing</code></strong>,
       },
       {
-        value: "Set the form\'s `processing` state",
+        value: <>Set the form\'s <code>processing</code> state</>,
       },
       {
         value: '',
@@ -308,10 +307,10 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`setSubmitted`**",
+        value: <strong><code>setSubmitted</code></strong>,
       },
       {
-        value: "Set the form\'s `submitted` state",
+        value: <>Set the form\'s <code>submitted</code> state</>,
       },
       {
         value: '',
@@ -319,7 +318,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`formRef`**",
+        value: <strong><code>formRef</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'The ref from the form HTML element',
@@ -330,7 +329,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`reset`**",
+        value: <strong><code>reset</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: 'Method to reset the form to its initial state',
@@ -341,7 +340,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`addFieldRow`**",
+        value: <strong><code>addFieldRow</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Method to add a row on an array or block field",
@@ -350,7 +349,8 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
         drawerTitle: 'addFieldRow',
         drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically add a row to an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'addFieldRow',
-        drawerContent: `
+        drawerContent: (
+<>
   <TableWithDrawers
     columns={[
       'Prop',
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     rows={[
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`path\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>path</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The path to the array or block field",
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
       ],
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`rowIndex\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>rowIndex</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The index of the row to add. If omitted, the row will be added to the end of the array.",
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
       ],
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`data\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>data</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The data to add to the row",
@@ -384,9 +384,14 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
     ]}
   />
 
+{' '}
 
-\`\`\`tsx
-import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
+<br />
+
+{' '}
+
+<pre>
+  {`import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
 
 export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
   const { addFieldRow } = useForm()
@@ -409,13 +414,12 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       Add Row
     </button>
   )
-}
-\`\`\`
+}`}
+</pre>
 
-An example config to go along with the Custom Component
-
-\`\`\`tsx
-const ExampleCollection = {
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <pre>
+{`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
   fields: [
     {
@@ -438,14 +442,15 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       },
     },
   ],
-}
-\`\`\`
-`
+}`}
+  </pre>
+</>
+        )
       }
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`removeFieldRow`**",
+        value: <strong><code>removeFieldRow</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Method to remove a row from an array or block field",
@@ -454,7 +459,8 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
         drawerTitle: 'removeFieldRow',
         drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically remove a row from an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'removeFieldRow',
-        drawerContent:  `
+        drawerContent: (
+<>
   <TableWithDrawers
     columns={[
       'Prop',
@@ -463,7 +469,7 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
     rows={[
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`path\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>path</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The path to the array or block field",
@@ -471,7 +477,7 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       ],
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`rowIndex\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>rowIndex</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The index of the row to remove",
@@ -480,10 +486,14 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
     ]}
   />
 
+{' '}
 
+<br />
 
-\`\`\`tsx
-import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
+{' '}
+
+<pre>
+  {`import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
 
 export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
   const { removeFieldRow } = useForm()
@@ -501,13 +511,12 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       Remove Row
     </button>
   )
-}
-\`\`\`
+}`}
+</pre>
 
-An example config to go along with the Custom Component
-
-\`\`\`tsx
-const ExampleCollection = {
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <pre>
+{`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
   fields: [
     {
@@ -530,14 +539,15 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       },
     },
   ],
-}
-\`\`\`
-`
+}`}
+  </pre>
+</>
+        )
       }
     ],
     [
       {
-        value: "**`replaceFieldRow`**",
+        value: <strong><code>replaceFieldRow</code></strong>,
       },
       {
         value: "Method to replace a row from an array or block field",
@@ -546,7 +556,8 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
         drawerTitle: 'replaceFieldRow',
         drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically replace a row from an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'replaceFieldRow',
-        drawerContent:  `
+        drawerContent: (
+<>
   <TableWithDrawers
     columns={[
       'Prop',
@@ -555,7 +566,7 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
     rows={[
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`path\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>path</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The path to the array or block field",
@@ -563,7 +574,7 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       ],
       [
         {
-          value: "**\\\`rowIndex\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>rowIndex</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The index of the row to replace",
@@ -571,7 +582,7 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       ],
       [
         {
-         value: "**\\\`data\\\`**",
+          value: <strong><code>data</code></strong>,
         },
         {
           value: "The data to replace within the row",
@@ -580,11 +591,14 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
     ]}
   />
 
+{' '}
 
+<br />
 
+{' '}
 
-\`\`\`tsx
-import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
+<pre>
+  {`import { useForm } from "payload/components/forms";
 
 export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
   const { replaceFieldRow } = useForm()
@@ -607,13 +621,12 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       Replace Row
     </button>
   )
-}
-\`\`\`
+}`}
+</pre>
 
-An example config to go along with the Custom Component
-
-\`\`\`tsx
-const ExampleCollection = {
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <pre>
+{`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
   fields: [
     {
@@ -636,9 +649,10 @@ const ExampleCollection = {
       },
     },
   ],
-}
-\`\`\`
-`
+}`}
+  </pre>
+</>
+        )
       }
     ],
   ]}
@@ -679,25 +693,20 @@ const CustomComponent: React.FC = () => {
 
 ## useDocumentInfo
 
-The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides information about the current document being edited, including the following:
+The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document currently being edited, including the following:
 
 | Property                  | Description                                                                                                        |
 | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`currentEditor`**       | The user currently editing the document.                                                                             |
-| **`docConfig`**              | Either the Collection or Global config of the document, depending on what is being edited.                         |
-| **`documentIsLocked`**    | Whether the document is currently locked by another user.                                                          |
+| **`collection`**          | If the doc is a collection, its Collection Config will be returned                                                 |
+| **`global`**              | If the doc is a global, its Global Config will be returned                                                         |
 | **`id`**                  | If the doc is a collection, its ID will be returned                                                                |
-| **`getDocPermissions`**   | Method to retrieve document-level user preferences.                                                 |
-| **`getDocPreferences`**   | Method to retrieve document-level user preferences.                                                 |
-| **`hasPublishedDoc`**     | Whether the document has a published version.                                                                      |
-| **`incrementVersionCount`** | Method to increment the version count of the document.                                                           |
-| **`preferencesKey`**      | The `preferences` key to use when interacting with document-level user preferences.                                 |
-| **`versions`**            | Versions of the current doc.                                                                                        |
-| **`unpublishedVersions`** | Unpublished versions of the current doc.                                                                            |
-| **`publishedDoc`**        | The currently published version of the doc being edited.                                                            |
-| **`getVersions`**         | Method to retrieve document versions.                                                               |
-| **`docPermissions`**      | The current documents permissions. Collection document permissions fallback when no id is present (i.e. on create). |
-| **`versionCount`**        | The current version count of the document.                                                                          |
+| **`preferencesKey`**      | The `preferences` key to use when interacting with document-level user preferences                                 |
+| **`versions`**            | Versions of the current doc                                                                                        |
+| **`unpublishedVersions`** | Unpublished versions of the current doc                                                                            |
+| **`publishedDoc`**        | The currently published version of the doc being edited                                                            |
+| **`getVersions`**         | Method to trigger the retrieval of document versions                                                               |
+| **`docPermissions`**      | The current documents permissions. Collection document permissions fallback when no id is present (i.e. on create) |
+| **`getDocPermissions`**   | Method to trigger the retrieval of document level permissions                                                      |
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -723,37 +732,6 @@ const LinkFromCategoryToPosts: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-## useListQuery
-
-The `useListQuery` hook is used to subscribe to the data, current query, and other properties used within the List View. You can use this hook within any Custom Component rendered within the List View.
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useListQuery } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-
-const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
-  // highlight-start
-  const { data, query } = useListQuery()
-  // highlight-end
-
-  // ...
-}
-```
-
-The `useListQuery` hook returns an object with the following properties:
-
-| Property          | Description                                                                                   |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`data`**        | The data that is being displayed in the List View.                                           |
-| **`defaultLimit`**| The default limit of items to display in the List View.                                      |
-| **`defaultSort`** | The default sort order of items in the List View.                                             |
-| **`handlePageChange`** | A method to handle page changes in the List View.                                         |
-| **`handlePerPageChange`** | A method to handle per page changes in the List View.                                   |
-| **`handleSearchChange`** | A method to handle search changes in the List View.                                     |
-| **`handleSortChange`** | A method to handle sort changes in the List View.                                         |
-| **`handleWhereChange`** | A method to handle where changes in the List View.                                       |
-| **`query`**       | The current query that is being used to fetch the data in the List View.                             |
-
 ## useLocale
 
 In any Custom Component you can get the selected locale object with the `useLocale` hook. `useLocale` gives you the full locale object, consisting of a `label`, `rtl`(right-to-left) property, and then `code`. Here is a simple example:
@@ -806,7 +784,7 @@ const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
 
 ## useConfig
 
-Used to retrieve the Payload [Client Config](./components#accessing-the-payload-config).
+Used to easily retrieve the Payload [Client Config](./components#accessing-the-payload-config).
 
 ```tsx
 'use client'

docs/admin/locked-documents.mdx

@@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ When a user starts editing a document, Payload locks it for that user. If anothe
 
 The lock will automatically expire after a set period of inactivity, configurable using the `duration` property in the `lockDocuments` configuration, after which others can resume editing.
 
-<Banner type="info"> **Note:** If your application does not require document locking, you can disable this feature for any collection or global by setting the `lockDocuments` property to `false`. </Banner>
+<Banner type="info"> <strong>Note:</strong> If your application does not require document locking, you can disable this feature for any collection or global by setting the <code>lockDocuments</code> property to <code>false</code>. </Banner>
 
 ### Config Options
 
 The `lockDocuments` property exists on both the Collection Config and the Global Config. Document locking is enabled by default, but you can customize the lock duration or turn off the feature for any collection or global.
 
-Here's an example configuration for document locking:
+Here’s an example configuration for document locking:
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'

docs/admin/metadata.mdx

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ The following options are available for Root Metadata:
 | **`titleSuffix`** | `string` | A suffix to append to the end of the title of every page. Defaults to "- Payload". |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Metadata](./collections), [Global Metadata](./globals), and [Document Metadata](./documents) in their respective configs.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
     meta: {
     // highlight-end
       title: 'My Global',
-      description: 'The best admin panel in the world',
+      description: 'The best
     },
   },
 }

docs/admin/overview.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overv
 
 The Admin Panel is designed to [white-label your brand](https://payloadcms.com/blog/white-label-admin-ui). You can endlessly customize and extend the Admin UI by swapping in your own [Custom Components](./components)—everything from simple field labels to entire views can be modified or replaced to perfectly tailor the interface for your editors.
 
-The Admin Panel is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org) and built with [React](https://react.dev) using the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app). It supports [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components), enabling the use of the [Local API](/docs/local-api/overview) on the front-end. You can install Payload into any [existing Next.js app in just one line](../getting-started/installation) and [deploy it anywhere](../production/deployment).
+The Admin Panel is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org) and built with [React](https://react.dev) using the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app). It supports [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components), enabling the use of the [Local API](/docs/local-api/overview) on the front-end. You can install Payload into any [existing Next.js app in just one line](../getting-started/installation) and [deploy it anywhere](../production).
 
 <Banner type="success">
   The Payload Admin Panel is designed to be as minimal and straightforward as possible to allow easy customization and control. [Learn more](./components).
@@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ As shown above, all Payload routes are nested within the `(payload)` route group
 The `admin` directory contains all the _pages_ related to the interface itself, whereas the `api` and `graphql` directories contains all the _routes_ related to the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). All admin routes are [easily configurable](#customizing-routes) to meet your application's exact requirements.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-  If you don't intend to use the Admin Panel, [REST API](../rest/overview), or [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can opt-out by simply deleting their corresponding directories within your Next.js app. The overhead, however, is completely constrained to these routes, and will not slow down or affect Payload outside when not in use.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you don't use the [REST API](../rest/overview) or [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can delete the [Next.js files corresponding to those routes](../admin/overview#project-structure), however, the overhead of this API is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down or affect Payload outside of the endpoints.
 </Banner>
 
 Finally, the `custom.scss` file is where you can add or override globally-oriented styles in the Admin Panel, such as modify the color palette. Customizing the look and feel through CSS alone is a powerful feature of the Admin Panel, [more on that here](./customizing-css).
@@ -86,23 +86,23 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                         | Description                                                                                                                                                           |
-|--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`avatar`**                   | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                              |
-| **`autoLogin`**                | Used to automate log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                            |
-| **`buildPath`**                | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                            |
-| **`components`**               | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                        |
-| **`custom`**                   | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                            |
-| **`dateFormat`**               | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                       |
-| **`livePreview`**              | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                         |
-| **`meta`**                     | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                                                 |
-| **`routes`**                   | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                 |
-| **`suppressHydrationWarning`** | If set to `true`, suppresses React hydration mismatch warnings during the hydration of the root `<html>` tag. Defaults to `false`.                                      |
-| **`theme`**                    | Restrict the Admin Panel theme to use only one of your choice. Default is `all`.                                                                                      |
-| **`user`**                     | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                          |
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                                                           |
+|---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`avatar`**      | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                              |
+| **`autoLogin`**   | Used to automate log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                            |
+| **`buildPath`**   | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                            |
+| **`components`**  | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                        |
+| **`custom`**      | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                            |
+| **`dateFormat`**  | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                       |
+| **`disable`**     | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                            |
+| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                         |
+| **`meta`**        | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata). |
+| **`routes`**      | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                 |
+| **`theme`**       | Restrict the Admin Panel theme to use only one of your choice. Default is `all`.
+| **`user`**        | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                          |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Admin Options](./collections) and [Global Admin Options](./globals) through their respective `admin` keys.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -122,8 +122,8 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
-
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
   The Admin Panel can only be used by a single auth-enabled Collection. To enable authentication for a Collection, simply set `auth: true` in the Collection's configuration. See [Authentication](../authentication/overview) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limit
 - `super-admin` - full access to the Admin Panel to perform any action
 - `editor` - limited access to the Admin Panel to only manage content
 
-To do this, add a `roles` or similar field to your auth-enabled Collection, then use the `access.admin` property to grant or deny access based on the value of that field. See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details. For a complete, working example of role-based access control, check out the official [Auth Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth).
+To do this, add a `roles` or similar field to your auth-enabled Collection, then use the `access.admin` property to grant or deny access based on the value of that field. See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details. For a complete, working example of role-based access control, check out the official [Auth Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth/payload).
 
 ## Customizing Routes
 
@@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ The following options are available:
 | `graphQLPlayground` | `/graphql-playground` | The GraphQL Playground.                           |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-  You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) and [Custom Views](./views).
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+   You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) and [Custom Views](./views).
 </Banner>
 
 #### Customizing Root-level Routes
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ app/
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   If you set Root-level Routes _before_ auto-generating the Admin Panel via `create-payload-app`, your [Project Structure](#project-structure) will already be set up correctly.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -231,13 +231,13 @@ The following options are available:
 | `unauthorized`    | `/unauthorized`         | The unauthorized page.                          |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   You can also swap out entire _views_ out for your own, using the `admin.views` property of the Payload Config. See [Custom Views](./views) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
 ## I18n
 
-The Payload Admin Panel is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/translations). Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser and used by the Admin Panel to display all text in that language. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported, English will be chosen. Users can easily specify their language by selecting one from their account page. See [I18n](../configuration/i18n) for more information.
+The Payload Admin Panel is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser and used by the Admin Panel to display all text in that language. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported, English will be chosen. Users can easily specify their language by selecting one from their account page. See [I18n](../configuration/i18n) for more information.
 
 ## Light and Dark Modes
 

docs/admin/preferences.mdx

@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a
 1. The last-known state of the `Nav` component, etc.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
-
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
   All preferences are stored on an individual user basis. Payload automatically recognizes the user
   that is reading or setting a preference via all provided authentication methods.
 </Banner>
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Payload automatically creates an internally used `payload-preferences` Collectio
 
 ## APIs
 
-Preferences are available to both [GraphQL](/docs/graphql/overview#preferences) and [REST](/docs/rest-api/overview#preferences) APIs.
+Preferences are available to both [GraphQL](/docs/graphql/overview#preferences) and [REST](/docs/rest-api/overview#) APIs.
 
 ## Adding or reading Preferences in your own components
 

docs/admin/views.mdx

@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ To swap in your own Custom View, first consult the list of available components,
 
 Root Views are the main views of the [Admin Panel](./overview). These are views that are scoped directly under the `/admin` route, such as the Dashboard or Account views.
 
-To swap Root Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your root [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+To easily swap Root Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-root-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your root [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ export const MyCustomView: React.FC<AdminViewProps> = ({
     >
       <Gutter>
         <h1>Custom Default Root View</h1>
-
+        <br />
         <p>This view uses the Default Template.</p>
       </Gutter>
     </DefaultTemplate>
@@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Payload exposes
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                |
 | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`Component`** * | Pass in the component path that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
-| **`path`** *      | Any valid URL path or array of paths that [`path-to-regexp`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/path-to-regex) understands.                                                                     |
+| **`Component`** \* | Pass in the component path that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
+| **`path`** \*      | Any valid URL path or array of paths that [`path-to-regexp`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/path-to-regex) understands.                                                                     |
 | **`exact`**        | Boolean. When true, will only match if the path matches the `usePathname()` exactly.                                                                                                     |
 | **`strict`**       | When true, a path that has a trailing slash will only match a `location.pathname` with a trailing slash. This has no effect when there are additional URL segments in the pathname. |
 | **`sensitive`**    | When true, will match if the path is case sensitive.|
 | **`meta`**         | Page metadata overrides to apply to this view within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                           |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Adding New Views
 
@@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 The above example shows how to add a new [Root View](#root-views), but the pattern is the same for [Collection Views](#collection-views), [Global Views](#global-views), and [Document Views](#document-views). For help on how to build your own Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
   Routes are cascading, so unless explicitly given the `exact` property, they will
   match on URLs that simply _start_ with the route's path. This is helpful when creating catch-all
   routes in your application. Alternatively, define your nested route _before_ your parent
@@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ The above example shows how to add a new [Root View](#root-views), but the patte
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Custom views are public**
-
+  <strong>Custom views are public</strong>
+  <br />
   Custom views are public by default. If your view requires a user to be logged in or to have certain access rights, you should handle that within your view component yourself.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ The above example shows how to add a new [Root View](#root-views), but the patte
 
 Collection Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections` route, such as the Collection List and Document Edit views.
 
-To swap out Collection Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+To easily swap out Collection Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 _For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   The `root` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `edit.default` key instead.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`list`** | The List View is used to show a list of documents for any given Collection.                                         |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   You can also add _new_ Collection Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ The following options are available:
 
 Global Views are views that are scoped under the `/globals` route, such as the Document Edit View.
 
-To swap out Global Views with your own or [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To easily swap out Global Views with your own or [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property in your [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ export const MyGlobalConfig: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
 _For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   The `root` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `edit.default` key instead.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Global. [More details](#document-views). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   You can also add _new_ Global Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ The following options are available:
 
 Document Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections/:collectionSlug/:id` or the `/globals/:globalSlug` route, such as the Edit View or the API View. All Document Views keep their overall structure across navigation changes, such as their title and tabs, and replace only the content below.
 
-To swap out Document Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views.Edit[key]` property in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+To easily swap out Document Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-document-views), use the `admin.components.views.Edit[key]` property in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -272,20 +272,20 @@ export const MyCollectionOrGlobalConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 _For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
- **Note:**
+ <strong>Note:</strong>
  If you need to replace the _entire_ Edit View, including _all_ nested Document Views, use the `root` key. See [Custom Collection Views](#collection-views) or [Custom Global Views](#global-views) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Property          | Description                                                                                                                                                     |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`root`**        | The Root View overrides all other nested views and routes. No document controls or tabs are rendered when this key is set.                                      |
-| **`default`**     | The Default View is the primary view in which your document is edited. It is rendered within the "Edit" tab.                                                    |
-| **`versions`**    | The Versions View is used to navigate the version history of a single document. It is rendered within the "Versions" tab. [More details](../versions/overview). |
-| **`version`**     | The Version View is used to edit a single version of a document. It is rendered within the "Version" tab. [More details](../versions/overview).                 |
-| **`api`**         | The API View is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document. It is rendered within the "API" tab.                                           |
-| **`livePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. It is rendered within the "Live Preview" tab. [More details](../live-preview/overview).     |
+| Property          | Description                                                                                                                 |
+| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`root`**        | The Root View overrides all other nested views and routes. No document controls or tabs are rendered when this key is set.  |
+| **`default`**     | The Default View is the primary view in which your document is edited. It is rendered within the "Edit" tab.     |
+| **`versions`**    | The Versions View is used to navigate the version history of a single document. It is rendered within the "Versions" tab. [More details](../versions).                    |
+| **`version`**     | The Version View is used to edit a single version of a document. It is rendered within the "Version" tab. [More details](../versions). |
+| **`api`**         | The API View is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document. It is rendered within the "API" tab.                                            |
+| **`livePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. It is rendered within the "Live Preview" tab. [More details](../live-preview).                        |
 
 ### Document Tabs
 
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
- **Note:**
+ <strong>Note:</strong>
  This applies to _both_ Collections _and_ Globals.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -350,26 +350,23 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Default Props
-
 Your Custom Views will be provided with the following props:
 
-| Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`initPageResult`**      | An object containing `req`, `payload`, `permissions`, etc.                                                                         |
-| **`clientConfig`**        | The Client Config object. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).                                        |
-| **`importMap`**           | The import map object.                                                                                                             |
-| **`params`**              | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes). |
-| **`searchParams`**        | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).  |
-| **`doc`**                 | The document being edited. Only available in Document Views. [More details](#document-views).                                      |
+| Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`initPageResult`**      | An object containing `req`, `payload`, `permissions`, etc.                                                                  |
+| **`clientConfig`**        | The Client Config object. [More details](../components#accessing-the-payload-config).                                                             |
+| **`importMap`**           | The import map object.                                                        |
+| **`params`**              | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes).     |
+| **`searchParams`**        | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).      |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive `payload` and `i18n` by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   It's up to you to secure your custom views. If your view requires a user to be logged in or to
   have certain access rights, you should handle that within your view component yourself.
 </Banner>

docs/authentication/api-keys.mdx

@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ For example, if you have a third-party service or external app that needs to be
 1. Generate a non-expiring API key for that user to request with.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br/>
   This is particularly useful as you can create a "user" that reflects an integration with a specific external service and assign a "role" or specific access only needed by that service/integration.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ User API keys are encrypted within the database, meaning that if your database i
 your API keys will not be.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
-
+  <br />
   The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will
   no longer be valid.
 </Banner>

docs/authentication/cookies.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via HTTP-only cookies. These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ const pages = await response.json()
 For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API, [read the MDN docs](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Fetch_API/Using_Fetch#Sending_a_request_with_credentials_included).
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
   the browsers Developer Tools > Application > Cookies > [your-domain-here]. The Developer tools
   will still show HTTP-only cookies.
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API,
 
 CSRF (cross-site request forgery) attacks are common and dangerous. By using an HTTP-only cookie, Payload removes many XSS vulnerabilities, however, CSRF attacks can still be possible.
 
-For example, let's say you have a popular app `https://payload-finances.com` that allows users to manage finances, send and receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - **no matter what page created the request**.
+For example, let's say you have a popular app `https://payload-finances.com` that allows users to manage finances, send and receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - <strong>no matter what page created the request</strong>.
 
 So, if a user of `https://payload-finances.com` is logged in and is browsing around on the internet, they might stumble onto a page with malicious intent. Let's look at an example:
 
@@ -126,6 +126,6 @@ If you're configuring [cors](../production/preventing-abuse#cross-origin-resourc
 
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Good to know:**
-  Setting up `secure: true` will not work if you're developing on `http://localhost` or any non-https domain. For local development you should conditionally set this to `false` based on the environment.
+  <strong>Good to know:</strong>
+  Setting up <code>secure: true</code> will not work if you're developing on <code>http://localhost</code> or any non-https domain. For local development you should conditionally set this to <code>false</code> based on the environment.
 </Banner>

docs/authentication/custom-strategies.mdx

@@ -19,15 +19,15 @@ A strategy is made up of the following:
 
 | Parameter                   | Description                                                               |
 | --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *               | The name of your strategy                                                 |
-| **`authenticate`** *  | A function that takes in the parameters below and returns a user or null. |
+| **`name`** \*               | The name of your strategy                                                 |
+| **`authenticate`** \*  | A function that takes in the parameters below and returns a user or null. |
 
 The `authenticate` function is passed the following arguments:
 
 | Argument            | Description                                                                                       |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`headers`** *    | The headers on the incoming request. Useful for retrieving identifiable information on a request. |
-| **`payload`** *    | The Payload class. Useful for authenticating the identifiable information against Payload.        |
+| **`headers`** \*    | The headers on the incoming request. Useful for retrieving identifiable information on a request. |
+| **`payload`** \*    | The Payload class. Useful for authenticating the identifiable information against Payload.        |
 | **`isGraphQL`**     | Whether or not the request was made from a GraphQL endpoint. Default is `false`.                  |
 
 

docs/authentication/email.mdx

@@ -26,16 +26,16 @@ export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Tip:**
-  Verification emails are fully customizable. [More details](#generateemailhtml).
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Verification emails are fully customizable. [More details](#generateEmailHTML).
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`generateEmailHTML`**    | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateemailhtml).     |
-| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateemailsubject). |
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
 
 #### generateEmailHTML
 
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
   frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
   verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
@@ -111,7 +111,6 @@ The following options are available:
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
 |----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`expiration`** | Configure how long password reset tokens remain valid, specified in milliseconds. |
 | **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
 | **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
 
@@ -152,7 +151,7 @@ export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
   on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
   GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
@@ -160,7 +159,7 @@ export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
   You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
   sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are

docs/authentication/jwt.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via JSON Web Tokens (JWT). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 export const UsersWithoutJWTs: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'users-without-jwts',
   auth: {
-    removeTokenFromResponse: true, // highlight-line
+    removeTokenFromRepsonse: true, // highlight-line
   },
 }
 ```

docs/authentication/operations.mdx

@@ -269,15 +269,11 @@ const result = await payload.verifyEmail({
 })
 ```
 
-**Note:** the token you need to pass to the `verifyEmail` function is unique to verification and is not the same as the token that you can retrieve from the `forgotPassword` operation. It can be found on the user document, as a hidden `_verificationToken` field. If you'd like to retrieve this token, you can use the Local API's `find` or `findByID` methods, setting `showHiddenFields: true`.
-
-**Note:** if you do not have a `config.serverURL` set, Payload will attempt to create one for you if the user was created via REST or GraphQL by looking at the incoming `req`. But this is not supported if you are creating the user via the Local API's `payload.create()` method. If this applies to you, and you do not have a `serverURL` set, you may want to override your `verify.generateEmailHTML` function to provide a full URL to link the user to a proper verification page.
-
 ## Unlock
 
 If a user locks themselves out and you wish to deliberately unlock them, you can utilize the Unlock operation. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) features an Unlock control automatically for all collections that feature max login attempts, but you can programmatically unlock users as well by using the Unlock operation.
 
-To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](../access-control/collections#unlock) access control function.
+To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](../access-control/overview#unlock) access control function.
 
 **Example REST API unlock**:
 
@@ -348,11 +344,9 @@ const token = await payload.forgotPassword({
 })
 ```
 
-**Note:** if you do not have a `config.serverURL` set, Payload will attempt to create one for you if the `forgot-password` operation was triggered via REST or GraphQL by looking at the incoming `req`. But this is not supported if you are calling `payload.forgotPassword()` via the Local API. If you do not have a `serverURL` set, you may want to override your `auth.forgotPassword.generateEmailHTML` function to provide a full URL to link the user to a proper reset-password page.
-
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
   You can stop the reset-password email from being sent via using the local API. This is helpful if
   you need to create user accounts programmatically, but not set their password for them. This
   effectively generates a reset password token which you can then use to send to a page you create,

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Here are some common use cases of Authentication in your own applications:
 
 When Authentication is enabled on a [Collection](../configuration/collections), Payload injects all necessary functionality to support the entire user flow. This includes all [auth-related operations](./operations) like account creation, logging in and out, and resetting passwords, all [auth-related emails](./email) like email verification and password reset, as well as any necessary UI to manage users from the Admin Panel.
 
-To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections#config-options):
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collection#auth):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ _Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
 Any [Collection](../configuration/collections) can opt-in to supporting Authentication. Once enabled, each Document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a "user". This enables a complete authentication workflow on your Collection, such as logging in and out, resetting their password, and more.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   By default, Payload provides an auth-enabled `User` Collection which is used to access the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -65,12 +65,12 @@ export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   For default auth behavior, set `auth: true`. This is a good starting point for most applications.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Auth-enabled Collections with be automatically injected with the `hash`, `salt`, and `email` fields. [More details](../fields/overview#field-names).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Warning:**
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
   The recommended way to use this feature is behind an [Environment Variable](../configuration/environment-vars). This will ensure it is _disabled_ in production.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Each of these strategies can work together or independently. You can also create
 
 ### HTTP-Only Cookies
 
-[HTTP-only cookies](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies) are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and **cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser**, unlike JWT's. [More details](./cookies).
+[HTTP-only cookies](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies) are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's. [More details](./cookies).
 
 ### JSON Web Tokens
 

docs/authentication/token-data.mdx

@@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br/>
   If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can define `saveToJWT` as a string.
 </Banner>
 

docs/cloud/configuration.mdx

@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Any of the features in Payload Cloud that require environment variables will aut
 Payment methods can be set per project and can be updated any time. You can use team’s default payment method, or add a new one. Modify your payment methods in your Project settings / Team settings.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:** All Payload Cloud teams that deploy a project require a card on file. This
+  <strong>Note:</strong> All Payload Cloud teams that deploy a project require a card on file. This
   helps us prevent fraud and abuse on our platform. If you select a plan with a free trial, you will
   not be charged until your trial period is over. We’ll remind you 7 days before your trial ends and
   you can cancel anytime.

docs/cloud/creating-a-project.mdx

@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Next, select your `GitHub Scope`. If you belong to multiple organizations, they
 After selecting your scope, create a unique `repository name` and select whether you want your repository to be public or private on GitHub.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** Public repositories can be accessed by anyone online, while private
+  <strong>Note:</strong> Public repositories can be accessed by anyone online, while private
   repositories grant access only to you and anyone you explicitly authorize.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Payload Cloud works for any Node.js + MongoDB app. From the New Project page, se
 _Creating a new project from an existing repository._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** In order to make use of the features of Payload Cloud in your own codebase,
-  you will need to add the [Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/payload-cloud) to your
+  <strong>Note:</strong> In order to make use of the features of Payload Cloud in your own codebase,
+  you will need to add the [Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-cloud) to your
   Payload app.
 </Banner>

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Your Payload Cloud project comes with a MongoDB serverless Atlas DB instance or
 
 Payload Cloud gives you S3 file storage backed by Cloudflare as a CDN, and this plugin extends Payload so that all of your media will be stored in S3 rather than locally.
 
-AWS Cognito is used for authentication to your S3 bucket. The [Payload Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/payload-cloud) will automatically pick up these values. These values are only if you'd like to access your files directly, outside of Payload Cloud.
+AWS Cognito is used for authentication to your S3 bucket. The [Payload Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-cloud) will automatically pick up these values. These values are only if you'd like to access your files directly, outside of Payload Cloud.
 
 ### Accessing Files Outside of Payload Cloud
 
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ From there, you are ready to make updates to your project. When you are ready to
 
 Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload Config:
 
-`pnpm add @payloadcms/payload-cloud`
+`yarn add @payloadcms/payload-cloud`
 
 ```js
 import { payloadCloudPlugin } from '@payloadcms/payload-cloud'

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   If your Collection is only ever meant to contain a single Document, consider using a [Global](./globals) instead.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Reminder:**
-  For more complex examples, see the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
@@ -67,19 +67,19 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order. Multiple fields can be specified by using a string array. |
 | **`dbName`**           | Custom table or Collection name depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                          |
 | **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                          |
-| **`fields`** *        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [More details](../fields/overview).                                                              |
-| **`graphQL`**          | Manage GraphQL-related properties for this collection. [More](#graphql)                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [More details](../fields/overview).                                                              |
+| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                        |
 | **`hooks`**            | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                                                           |
 | **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                       |
 | **`lockDocuments`**    | Enables or disables document locking. By default, document locking is enabled. Set to an object to configure, or set to `false` to disable locking. [More details](../admin/locked-documents).                       |
-| **`slug`** *          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                      |
 | **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                  |
 | **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](../upload/overview) documentation.                                                                        |
 | **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#collection-config).                                                                                  |
-| **`defaultPopulate`**  | Specify which fields to select when this Collection is populated from another document. [More Details](../queries/select#defaultpopulate-collection-config-property).                                                |
+| **`defaultPopulate`**  | Specify which fields to select when this Collection is populated from another document. [More Details](../queries/select#defaultpopulate-collection-config-property).                                                  |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Fields
 
@@ -97,19 +97,6 @@ Fields define the schema of the Documents within a Collection. To learn more, go
 
 You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Collection Admin Options](../admin/collections) documentation.
 
-## GraphQL
-
-You can completely disable GraphQL for this collection by passing `graphQL: false` to your collection config. This will completely disable all queries, mutations, and types from appearing in your GraphQL schema.
-
-You can also pass an object to the collection's `graphQL` property, which allows you to define the following properties:
-
-| Option                 | Description                                                                         |
-| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`singularName`**     | Override the "singular" name that will be used in GraphQL schema generation.        |
-| **`pluralName`**       | Override the "plural" name that will be used in GraphQL schema generation.          |
-| **`disableQueries`**   | Disable all GraphQL queries that correspond to this collection by passing `true`.   |
-| **`disableMutations`** | Disable all GraphQL mutations that correspond to this collection by passing `true`. |
-
 ## TypeScript
 
 You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Collection configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Collection Config, `CollectionConfig` and `SanitizeCollectionConfig`.

docs/configuration/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ For security and safety reasons, the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does **not
 If you are building a [Custom Component](../admin/components) and need to access Environment Variables from the client-side, you can do so by prefixing them with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Be careful about what variables you provide to your client-side code. Analyze every single one to make sure that you're not accidentally leaking sensitive information. Only ever include keys that are safe for the public to read in plain text.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Be sure that `dotenv` can find your `.env` file. By default, it will look for a file named `.env` in the root of your project. If you need to specify a different file, pass the path into the config options.
 </Banner>
 

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except that they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global Document is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global Document is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
 Globals are the primary way to structure singletons in Payload, such as a header navigation, site-wide banner alerts, or app-wide localized strings. Each Global can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
 
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   If you have more than one Global that share the same structure, consider using a [Collection](../configuration/collections) instead.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Reminder:**
-  For more complex examples, see the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
@@ -73,16 +73,16 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`dbName`**        | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                    |
 | **`description`**   | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                   |
 | **`endpoints`**     | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                      |
-| **`fields`** *     | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [More details](../fields/overview).                                            |
-| **`graphQL`**       | Manage GraphQL-related properties related to this global. [More details](#graphql)                                                                                                             |
+| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [More details](../fields/overview).                                            |
+| **`graphQL.name`**  | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                       |
 | **`hooks`**         | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).                                                                                                                         |
 | **`label`**         | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                        |
 | **`lockDocuments`** | Enables or disables document locking. By default, document locking is enabled. Set to an object to configure, or set to `false` to disable locking. [More details](../admin/locked-documents). |
-| **`slug`** *       | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                    |
+| **`slug`** \*       | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                    |
 | **`typescript`**    | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                            |
 | **`versions`**      | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#globals-config).                                                               |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Fields
 
@@ -100,18 +100,6 @@ Fields define the schema of the Global. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fie
 
 You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis. To learn more, go to the [Global Admin Options](../admin/globals) documentation.
 
-## GraphQL
-
-You can completely disable GraphQL for this global by passing `graphQL: false` to your global config. This will completely disable all queries, mutations, and types from appearing in your GraphQL schema.
-
-You can also pass an object to the global's `graphQL` property, which allows you to define the following properties:
-
-| Option                 | Description                                                                         |
-| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`**             | Override the name that will be used in GraphQL schema generation.                   |
-| **`disableQueries`**   | Disable all GraphQL queries that correspond to this global by passing `true`.       |
-| **`disableMutations`** | Disable all GraphQL mutations that correspond to this global by passing `true`.     |
-
 ## TypeScript
 
 You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Global configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Global Config, `GlobalConfig` and `SanitizeGlobalConfig`.

docs/configuration/i18n.mdx

@@ -6,9 +6,9 @@ desc: Manage and customize internationalization support in your CMS editor exper
 keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
+The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
 
-By default, Payload comes preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language is detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
 
 To configure I18n, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   If there is a language that Payload does not yet support, we accept [code contributions](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
- **Tip:**
+ <strong>Tip:</strong>
  It's best to only support the languages that you need so that the bundled JavaScript is kept to a minimum for your project.
 </Banner>
 

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   localization: {
-    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'], // required
+    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'] // required
     defaultLocale: 'en', // required
   },
 })
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Localization works very well alongside [I18n](/docs/configuration/i18n).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -93,12 +93,12 @@ The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to def
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
 | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`code`** *        | Unique code to identify the language throughout the APIs for `locale` and `fallbackLocale`                                     |
+| **`code`** \*        | Unique code to identify the language throughout the APIs for `locale` and `fallbackLocale`                                     |
 | **`label`**          | A string to use for the selector when choosing a language, or an object keyed on the i18n keys for different languages in use. |
 | **`rtl`**            | A boolean that when true will make the admin UI display in Right-To-Left.                                                      |
 | **`fallbackLocale`** | The code for this language to fallback to when properties of a document are not present.                                       |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Field Localization
 
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the databas
 All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Enabling Localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
   localized "sets" of all fields contained within the field. For example, if you have a page layout
   using a blocks field type, you have the choice of either localizing the full layout, by enabling
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even t
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   When converting an existing field to or from `localized: true` the data structure in the document
   will change for this field and so existing data for this field will be lost. Before changing the
   Localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
@@ -205,8 +205,8 @@ const posts = await payload.find({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   The REST and Local APIs can return all Localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
-  the **locale** parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
+  the <strong>locale</strong> parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
   back as the full objects keyed for each locale instead of the single, translated value.
 </Banner>

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management Sys
 
 Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon.
 
-Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
+Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice, to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
 
 The Payload Config is a `payload.config.ts` file typically located in the root of your project:
 
@@ -23,13 +23,13 @@ export default buildConfig({
 The Payload Config is strongly typed and ties directly into Payload's TypeScript codebase. This means your IDE (such as VSCode) will provide helpful information like type-ahead suggestions while you write your config.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   The location of your Payload Config can be customized. [More details](#customizing--automating-config-location-detection).
 </Banner>
 
 ## Config Options
 
-To author your Payload Config, first determine which [Database](../database/overview) you'd like to use, then use [Collections](./collections) or [Globals](./globals) to define the schema of your data through [Fields](../fields/overview).
+To author your Payload Config, first determine which [Database](../database/overview) you'd like to use, then use [Collections](./collections) or [Globals](./globals) to define the schema of your data.
 
 Here is one of the simplest possible Payload configs:
 
@@ -57,55 +57,56 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
-  For more complex examples, see the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options).                                                                              |
-| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts for Payload to execute.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                                                         |
-| **`db`** *                 | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview).                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app. This includes the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port.                                          |
-| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections).                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`compatibility`**        | Compatibility flags for earlier versions of Payload. [More details](#compatibility-flags).                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals).                                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More details](#cross-origin-resource-sharing-cors). |
-| **`localization`**         | Opt-in to translate your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization).                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`logger`**               | Logger options, logger options with a destination stream, or an instantiated logger instance. [More details](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=options).                                                                      |
-| **`loggingLevels`**        | An object to override the level to use in the logger for Payload's errors.                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options).                                                            |
-| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload to accept cookies from. [More details](../authentication/cookies#csrf-attacks).                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation.                                                                                                     |
-| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                        |
-| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                                                                   |
-| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                                                           |
-| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes).                                                                                                             |
-| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview).                                                                                                                                           |
-| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry).                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                                                          |
-| **`hooks`**                | An array of Root Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`plugins`**              | An array of Plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview).                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`endpoints`**            | An array of Custom Endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                             |
-| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n).                                                                            |
-| **`secret`** *             | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing.                                                                                                      |
-| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here.                                                                      |
-| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript).                                                                                                                                                             |
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options).                                                |
+| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts for Payload to execute.                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                           |
+| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview).                                                                                                      |
+| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app. This includes the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port.            |
+| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections).                                                                                                                  |
+| **`compatibility`**        | Compatibility flags for earlier versions of Payload. [More details](#compatibility-flags).                                                                                                     |
+| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals).                                                                                                                          |
+| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More details](#cors). |
+| **`localization`**         | Opt-in to translate your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization).                                                                                                        |
+| **`logger`**               | Logger options, logger options with a destination stream, or an instantiated logger instance. [More details](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=options).                                        |
+| **`loggingLevels`**        | An object to override the level to use in the logger for Payload's errors.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options).                              |
+| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                               |
+| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload to accept cookies from. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection).                                                                 |
+| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                                     |
+| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation.                                                                       |
+| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. [More details](../queries/depth).                          |
+| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                                     |
+| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                             |
+| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes).                                                                               |
+| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview).                                                                                                             |
+| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry).                                                                                                                      |
+| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                            |
+| **`hooks`**                | An array of Root Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`plugins`**              | An array of Plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview).                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`endpoints`**            | An array of Custom Endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n).                                              |
+| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing.                                                                        |
+| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here.                                        |
+| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript).                                                                                                                               |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Some properties are removed from the client-side bundle. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).
 </Banner>
 
+
 ### Typescript Config
 
 Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage. These settings are used to auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for your [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals), and to ensure that Payload uses your [Generated Types](../typescript/overview) for all [Local API](../local-api/overview) methods.
@@ -139,10 +140,10 @@ For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Conf
 1. The `compilerOptions` in your `tsconfig`*
 1. The `dist` directory*
 
-_* Config location detection is different between development and production environments. See below for more details._
+_\* Config location detection is different between development and production environments. See below for more details._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured for Payload to auto-detect your config location. If if does not exist, or does not specify the proper `compilerOptions`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -194,7 +195,7 @@ To use a custom config location, set the `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` environment varia
 ```
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` can be either an absolute path, or path relative to your current working directory.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -204,7 +205,7 @@ Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. Th
 
 For more information about what we track, take a look at our [privacy policy](/privacy).
 
-## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)#cors
+## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)
 
 Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) can be configured with either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, a wildcard string (`*`) to accept incoming requests from any domain, or a object with the following properties:
 

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -51,44 +51,12 @@ export async function down({ payload, req }: MigrateDownArgs): Promise<void> {
 
 ## Using Transactions
 
-When migrations are run, each migration is performed in a new [transaction](/docs/database/transactions) for you. All
+When migrations are run, each migration is performed in a new [transactions](/docs/database/transactions) for you. All
 you need to do is pass the `req` object to any [local API](/docs/local-api/overview) or direct database calls, such as
 `payload.db.updateMany()`, to make database changes inside the transaction. Assuming no errors were thrown, the transaction is committed
 after your `up` or `down` function runs. If the migration errors at any point or fails to commit, it is caught and the
 transaction gets aborted. This way no change is made to the database if the migration fails.
 
-### Using database directly with the transaction
-
-Additionally, you can bypass Payload's layer entirely and perform operations directly on your underlying database within the active transaction:
-
-### MongoDB:
-```ts
-import { type MigrateUpArgs } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-
-export async function up({ session, payload, req }: MigrateUpArgs): Promise<void> {
-  const posts = await payload.db.collections.posts.collection.find({ session }).toArray()
-}
-```
-
-### Postgres:
-```ts
-import { type MigrateUpArgs, sql } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-
-export async function up({ db, payload, req }: MigrateUpArgs): Promise<void> {
-  const { rows: posts } = await db.execute(sql`SELECT * from posts`)
-}
-```
-
-### SQLite:
-In SQLite, transactions are disabled by default. [More](./transactions).
-```ts
-import { type MigrateUpArgs, sql } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
-
-export async function up({ db, payload, req }: MigrateUpArgs): Promise<void> {
-  const { rows: posts } = await db.run(sql`SELECT * from posts`)
-}
-```
-
 ## Migrations Directory
 
 Each DB adapter has an optional property `migrationDir` where you can override where you want your migrations to be
@@ -189,7 +157,7 @@ You can disable this setting and solely use migrations to manage your local deve
 
 For this reason, we suggest that you leave `push` as its default setting and treat your local dev database as a sandbox.
 
-For more information about push mode and prototyping in development, [click here](./postgres#prototyping-in-development-mode).
+For more information about push mode and prototyping in development, [click here](./postgres#prototyping-in-dev-mode).
 
 The typical workflow in Payload is to build out your Payload configs, install plugins, and make progress in development mode - allowing Drizzle to push your changes to your local database for you. Once you're finished, you can create a migration.
 

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -30,15 +30,14 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Options
 
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| `autoPluralization`        | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s.                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| `connectOptions`           | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose.                                                        |
-| `collectionsSchemaOptions` | Customize Mongoose schema options for collections.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
-| `disableIndexHints`        | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false                |
-| `migrationDir`             | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| `transactionOptions`       | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions.                                                                                                                                |
-| `collation`                | Enable language-specific string comparison with customizable options. Available on MongoDB 3.4+. Defaults locale to "en". Example: `{ strength: 3 }`. For a full list of collation options and their definitions, see the [MongoDB documentation](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/collation/). |
+| Option               | Description |
+| -------------------- | ----------- |
+| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s. |
+| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose. |
+| `disableIndexHints`  | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false |
+| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
+| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions. |
+| `collation`          | Enable language-specific string comparison with customizable options. Available on MongoDB 3.4+. Defaults locale to "en". Example: `{ strength: 3 }`. For a full list of collation options and their definitions, see the [MongoDB documentation](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/collation/). |
 
 ## Access to Mongoose models
 

docs/database/overview.mdx

@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   The Database Adapter is an external dependency and must be installed in your project separately from Payload. You can find the installation instructions for each Database Adapter in their respective documentation.
 </Banner>
 

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -50,48 +50,31 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
-  If when using `vercelPostgresAdapter` your `process.env.POSTGRES_URL` or `pool.connectionString` points to a local database (e.g hostname has `localhost` or `127.0.0.1`) we use the `pg` module for pooling instead of `@vercel/postgres`. This is because `@vercel/postgres` doesn't work with local databases, if you want to disable that behavior, you can pass `forceUseVercelPostgres: true` to adapter's 'args and follow [Vercel guide](https://vercel.com/docs/storage/vercel-postgres/local-development#option-2:-local-postgres-instance-with-docker) for a Docker Neon DB setup.
-</Banner>
-
 ## Options
 
 | Option                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `pool` *                   | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres` or to `@vercel/postgres`              |
+| `pool` \*                   | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres` or to `@vercel/postgres`              |
 | `push`                      | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
 | `migrationDir`              | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
 | `schemaName` (experimental) | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
 | `idType`                    | A string of 'serial', or 'uuid' that is used for the data type given to id columns.                                                                                              |
 | `transactionOptions`        | A PgTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                       |
-| `disableCreateDatabase`     | Pass `true` to disable auto database creation if it doesn't exist. Defaults to `false`.                                                                                          |
+| `disableCreateDatabase`     | Pass `true` to disale auto database creation if it doesn't exist. Defaults to `false`.                                                                                           |
 | `localesSuffix`             | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
 | `relationshipsSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
 | `versionsSuffix`            | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
 | `beforeSchemaInit`          | Drizzle schema hook. Runs before the schema is built. [More Details](#beforeschemainit)                                                                                          |
 | `afterSchemaInit`           | Drizzle schema hook. Runs after the schema is built. [More Details](#afterschemainit)                                                                                            |
-| `generateSchemaOutputFile`  | Override generated schema from `payload generate:db-schema` file path. Defaults to `{CWD}/src/payload-generated.schema.ts`                                                       |
 
 ## Access to Drizzle
 
 After Payload is initialized, this adapter will expose the full power of Drizzle to you for use if you need it.
 
-To ensure type-safety, you need to generate Drizzle schema first with:
-```sh
-npx payload generate:db-schema
-```
+You can access Drizzle as follows:
 
-Then, you can access Drizzle as follows:
-```ts
-import { posts } from './payload-generated-schema'
-// To avoid installing Drizzle, you can import everything that drizzle has from our re-export path.
-import { eq, sql, and } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres/drizzle'
-
-// Drizzle's Querying API: https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/rqb
-const posts = await payload.db.drizzle.query.posts.findMany()
-// Drizzle's Select API https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/select
-const result = await payload.db.drizzle.select().from(posts).where(and(eq(posts.id, 50), sql`lower(${posts.title}) = 'example post title'`))
+```text
+payload.db.drizzle
 ```
 
 ## Tables, relations, and enums
@@ -126,7 +109,7 @@ Runs before the schema is built. You can use this hook to extend your database s
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-import { integer, pgTable, serial } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres/drizzle/pg-core'
+import { integer, pgTable, serial } from 'drizzle-orm/pg-core'
 
 postgresAdapter({
   beforeSchemaInit: [
@@ -195,7 +178,7 @@ postgresAdapter({
 })
 ```
 
-Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection.
+Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection. 
 
 
 ### afterSchemaInit
@@ -206,7 +189,7 @@ The following example adds the `extra_integer_column` column and a composite ind
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-import { index, integer } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres/drizzle/pg-core'
+import { index, integer } from 'drizzle-orm/pg-core'
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -248,45 +231,3 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 
 ```
-
-### Note for generated schema:
-Columns and tables, added in schema hooks won't be added to the generated via `payload generate:db-schema` Drizzle schema.
-If you want them to be there, you either have to edit this file manually or mutate the internal Payload "raw" SQL schema in the `beforeSchemaInit`:
-
-```ts
-import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-
-postgresAdapter({
-  beforeSchemaInit: [
-    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
-      // Add a new table
-      adapter.rawTables.myTable = {
-        name: 'my_table',
-        columns: {
-          my_id: {
-            name: 'my_id',
-            type: 'serial',
-            primaryKey: true
-          }
-        }
-      }
-
-      // Add a new column to generated by Payload table:
-      adapter.rawTables.posts.columns.customColumn = {
-        name: 'custom_column',
-        // Note that Payload SQL doesn't support everything that Drizzle does.
-        type: 'integer',
-        notNull: true
-      }
-      // Add a new index to generated by Payload table:
-      adapter.rawTables.posts.indexes.customColumnIdx = {
-        name: 'custom_column_idx',
-        unique: true,
-        on: ['custom_column']
-      }
-
-      return schema
-    },
-  ],
-})
-```

docs/database/sqlite.mdx

@@ -34,42 +34,27 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Options
 
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| -------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `client` *                | [Client connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/get-started-sqlite#turso) that will be passed to `createClient` from `@libsql/client`.                                 |
-| `push`                     | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
-| `migrationDir`             | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
-| `logger`                   | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                           |
-| `idType`                   | A string of 'number', or 'uuid' that is used for the data type given to id columns.                                                                                              |
-| `transactionOptions`       | A SQLiteTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                   |
-| `localesSuffix`            | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
-| `relationshipsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
-| `versionsSuffix`           | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
-| `beforeSchemaInit`         | Drizzle schema hook. Runs before the schema is built. [More Details](#beforeschemainit)                                                                                          |
-| `afterSchemaInit`          | Drizzle schema hook. Runs after the schema is built. [More Details](#afterschemainit)                                                                                            |
-| `generateSchemaOutputFile` | Override generated schema from `payload generate:db-schema` file path. Defaults to `{CWD}/src/payload-generated.schema.ts`                                                       |
-| `autoIncrement`            | Pass `true` to enable SQLite [AUTOINCREMENT](https://www.sqlite.org/autoinc.html) for primary keys to ensure the same ID cannot be reused from deleted rows                      |
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `client` \*           | [Client connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/get-started-sqlite#turso) that will be passed to `createClient` from `@libsql/client`.                                 |
+| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
+| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
+| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                           |
+| `transactionOptions`  | A SQLiteTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                   |
+| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
+| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
+| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
+| `beforeSchemaInit`    | Drizzle schema hook. Runs before the schema is built. [More Details](#beforeschemainit)                                                                                          |
+| `afterSchemaInit`     | Drizzle schema hook. Runs after the schema is built. [More Details](#afterschemainit)                                                                                            |
 
 ## Access to Drizzle
 
 After Payload is initialized, this adapter will expose the full power of Drizzle to you for use if you need it.
 
-To ensure type-safety, you need to generate Drizzle schema first with:
-```sh
-npx payload generate:db-schema
-```
+You can access Drizzle as follows:
 
-Then, you can access Drizzle as follows:
-```ts
-// Import table from the generated file
-import { posts } from './payload-generated-schema'
-// To avoid installing Drizzle, you can import everything that drizzle has from our re-export path.
-import { eq, sql, and } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite/drizzle'
-
-// Drizzle's Querying API: https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/rqb
-const posts = await payload.db.drizzle.query.posts.findMany()
-// Drizzle's Select API https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/select
-const result = await payload.db.drizzle.select().from(posts).where(and(eq(posts.id, 50), sql`lower(${posts.title}) = 'example post title'`))
+```text
+payload.db.drizzle
 ```
 
 ## Tables and relations
@@ -103,7 +88,7 @@ Runs before the schema is built. You can use this hook to extend your database s
 
 ```ts
 import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
-import { integer, sqliteTable } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite/drizzle/sqlite-core'
+import { integer, sqliteTable } from 'drizzle-orm/sqlite-core'
 
 sqliteAdapter({
   beforeSchemaInit: [
@@ -172,7 +157,7 @@ sqliteAdapter({
 })
 ```
 
-Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection.
+Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection. 
 
 
 ### afterSchemaInit
@@ -183,7 +168,7 @@ The following example adds the `extra_integer_column` column and a composite ind
 
 ```ts
 import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
-import { index, integer } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite/drizzle/sqlite-core'
+import { index, integer } from 'drizzle-orm/sqlite-core'
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -225,45 +210,3 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 
 ```
-
-### Note for generated schema:
-Columns and tables, added in schema hooks won't be added to the generated via `payload generate:db-schema` Drizzle schema.
-If you want them to be there, you either have to edit this file manually or mutate the internal Payload "raw" SQL schema in the `beforeSchemaInit`:
-
-```ts
-import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
-
-sqliteAdapter({
-  beforeSchemaInit: [
-    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
-      // Add a new table
-       adapter.rawTables.myTable = {
-        name: 'my_table',
-        columns: {
-          my_id: {
-            name: 'my_id',
-            type: 'integer',
-            primaryKey: true
-          }
-        }
-      }
-
-      // Add a new column to generated by Payload table:
-      adapter.rawTables.posts.columns.customColumn = {
-        name: 'custom_column',
-        // Note that Payload SQL doesn't support everything that Drizzle does.
-        type: 'integer',
-        notNull: true
-      }
-      // Add a new index to generated by Payload table:
-      adapter.rawTables.posts.indexes.customColumnIdx = {
-        name: 'custom_column_idx',
-        unique: true,
-        on: ['custom_column']
-      }
-
-      return schema
-    },
-  ],
-})
-```

docs/database/transactions.mdx

@@ -11,17 +11,11 @@ Database transactions allow your application to make a series of database change
 By default, Payload will use transactions for all data changing operations, as long as it is supported by the configured database. Database changes are contained within all Payload operations and any errors thrown will result in all changes being rolled back without being committed. When transactions are not supported by the database, Payload will continue to operate as expected without them.
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
-
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
   MongoDB requires a connection to a replicaset in order to make use of transactions.
 </Banner>
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
-
-  Transactions in SQLite are disabled by default. You need to pass `transactionOptions: {}` to enable them.
-</Banner>
-
 The initial request made to Payload will begin a new transaction and attach it to the `req.transactionID`. If you have a `hook` that interacts with the database, you can opt in to using the same transaction by passing the `req` in the arguments. For example:
 
 ```ts

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -24,8 +24,8 @@ An email adapter will require at least the following fields:
 
 | Option                      | Description                                                                      |
 | --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`defaultFromName`** *    | The name part of the From field that will be seen on the delivered email         |
-| **`defaultFromAddress`** * | The email address part of the From field that will be used when delivering email |
+| **`defaultFromName`** \*    | The name part of the From field that will be seen on the delivered email         |
+| **`defaultFromAddress`** \* | The email address part of the From field that will be used when delivering email |
 
 
 ### Official Email Adapters

docs/examples/overview.mdx

@@ -6,22 +6,36 @@ desc:
 keywords: example, examples, starter, boilerplate, template, templates
 ---
 
-Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your project no matter what you are working on. These examples are designed to be easy to get up and running, and to be easy to understand. They showcase nothing more than the specific features being demonstrated so you can easily decipher precisely what is going on.
+Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your project no matter what you are working on. These examples are designed to be easy to get up and running, and to be easy to understand. They showcase nothing more than the specific features being demonstrated so you can easily decipher what is going on.
+
+Examples are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new examples have been added. If you have a specific example you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
 
 - [Auth](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth)
 - [Custom Components](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-components)
+- [Custom Server](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server)
 - [Draft Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview)
 - [Email](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/email)
 - [Form Builder](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/form-builder)
+- [Hierarchy](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/hierarchy)
 - [Live Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview)
 - [Multi-tenant](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/multi-tenant)
+- [Nested Docs](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/nested-docs)
+- [Redirects](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/redirects)
 - [Tailwind / Shadcn-ui](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/tailwind-shadcn-ui)
+- [Tests](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/testing)
+- [Virtual Fields](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/virtual-fields)
 - [White-label Admin UI](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/whitelabel)
 
-If you'd like to run the examples, you can use `create-payload-app` to create a project from one:
+When necessary, some examples include a front-end. Examples that require a front-end share this folder structure:
 
-```sh
-npx create-payload-app --example example_name
+```plaintext
+example/
+├── payload/
+├── next-app/
+├── next-pages/
+├── react-router/
+├── vue/
+├── svelte/
 ```
 
-We are adding new examples every day, so if your particular use case is not demonstrated in any existing example, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
+Where `payload` is your Payload project, and the other directories are dedicated to their respective front-end framework. We are adding new examples every day, so if your framework of choice is not yet supported in any particular example, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ export const MyArrayField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                |
-| **`fields`** *        | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                  |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ export const MyArrayField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: The Blocks Field is a great layout build and can be used to construct any
 keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-The Blocks Field is **incredibly powerful** storing an array of objects based on the fields that your define, where each item in the array is a "block" with its own unique schema.
+The Blocks Field is <strong>incredibly powerful</strong>, storing an array of objects based on the fields that your define, where each item in the array is a "block" with its own unique schema.
 
 Blocks are a great way to create a flexible content model that can be used to build a wide variety of content types, including:
 
@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`blocks`** *        | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`blocks`** \*        | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 
@@ -84,58 +84,13 @@ The Blocks Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin
 | **`initCollapsed`**    | Set the initial collapsed state |
 | **`isSortable`**       | Disable order sorting by setting this value to `false` |
 
-#### Customizing the way your block is rendered in Lexical
-
-If you're using this block within the [Lexical editor](/docs/rich-text/overview), you can also customize how the block is rendered in the Lexical editor itself by specifying custom components.
-
-- `admin.components.Label` - pass a custom React component here to customize the way that the label is rendered for this block
-- `admin.components.Block` - pass a component here to completely override the way the block is rendered in Lexical with your own component
-
-This is super handy if you'd like to present your editors with a very deliberate and nicely designed block "preview" right in your rich text.
-
-For example, if you have a `gallery` block, you might want to actually render the gallery of images directly in your Lexical block. With the `admin.components.Block` property, you can do exactly that!
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**<br/>
-  If you customize the way your block is rendered in Lexical, you can import utility components to easily edit / remove your block - so that you don't have to build all of this yourself.
-</Banner>
-
-To import these utility components for one of your custom blocks, you can import the following:
-
-```ts
-import {
-  // Edit block buttons (choose the one that corresponds to your usage)
-  // When clicked, this will open a drawer with your block's fields
-  // so your editors can edit them
-  InlineBlockEditButton,
-  BlockEditButton,
-
-  // Buttons that will remove this block from Lexical
-  // (choose the one that corresponds to your usage)
-  InlineBlockRemoveButton,
-  BlockRemoveButton,
-
-  // The label that should be rendered for an inline block
-  InlineBlockLabel,
-
-  // The default "container" that is rendered for an inline block
-  // if you want to re-use it
-  InlineBlockContainer,
-
-  // The default "collapsible" UI that is rendered for a regular block
-  // if you want to re-use it
-  BlockCollapsible,
-
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client'
-```
-
 ## Block Configs
 
 Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
   Best practice is to define each block config in its own file, and then import them into your
   Blocks field as necessary. This way each block config can be easily shared between fields. For
   instance, using the "layout builder" example, you might want to feature a few of the same blocks
@@ -145,14 +100,14 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 
 | Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                         |
 | -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`slug`** *               | Identifier for this block type. Will be saved on each block as the `blockType` property.                                                                                            |
-| **`fields`** *             | Array of fields to be stored in this block.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`slug`** \*              | Identifier for this block type. Will be saved on each block as the `blockType` property.                                                                                            |
+| **`fields`** \*            | Array of fields to be stored in this block.                                                                                                                                         |
 | **`labels`**               | Customize the block labels that appear in the Admin dashboard. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                             |
 | **`imageURL`**             | Provide a custom image thumbnail to help editors identify this block in the Admin UI.                                                                                               |
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
-| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                               |
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 | **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
 ### Auto-generated data per block

docs/fields/checkbox.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyCheckboxField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ export const MyCheckboxField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/code.mdx

@@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database#overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/collapsible.mdx

@@ -35,12 +35,12 @@ export const MyCollapsibleField: Field = {
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`label`** *  | A label to render within the header of the collapsible component. This can be a string, function or react component. Function/components receive `({ data, path })` as args. |
-| **`fields`** * | Array of field types to nest within this Collapsible.                                                                                                                        |
+| **`label`** \*  | A label to render within the header of the collapsible component. This can be a string, function or react component. Function/components receive `({ data, path })` as args. |
+| **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Collapsible.                                                                                                                        |
 | **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                    |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                    |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyDateField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ export const MyDateField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 
@@ -70,23 +70,23 @@ The Date Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Co
 | **`placeholder`**              | Placeholder text for the field.                                                                                                        |
 | **`date`**                     | Pass options to customize date field appearance.                                                                                       |
 | **`date.displayFormat`**       | Format date to be shown in field **cell**.                                                                                             |
-| **`date.pickerAppearance`** * | Determines the appearance of the datepicker: `dayAndTime` `timeOnly` `dayOnly` `monthOnly`.                                            |
-| **`date.monthsToShow`** *     | Number of months to display max is 2. Defaults to 1.                                                                                   |
-| **`date.minDate`** *          | Min date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
-| **`date.maxDate`** *          | Max date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
-| **`date.minTime`** *          | Min time value to allow.                                                                                                               |
-| **`date.maxTime`** *          | Max date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
-| **`date.overrides`** *        | Pass any valid props directly to the [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md) |
-| **`date.timeIntervals`** *    | Time intervals to display. Defaults to 30 minutes.                                                                                     |
-| **`date.timeFormat`** *       | Determines time format. Defaults to `'h:mm aa'`.                                                                                       |
+| **`date.pickerAppearance`** \* | Determines the appearance of the datepicker: `dayAndTime` `timeOnly` `dayOnly` `monthOnly`.                                            |
+| **`date.monthsToShow`** \*     | Number of months to display max is 2. Defaults to 1.                                                                                   |
+| **`date.minDate`** \*          | Min date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
+| **`date.maxDate`** \*          | Max date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
+| **`date.minTime`** \*          | Min time value to allow.                                                                                                               |
+| **`date.maxTime`** \*          | Max date value to allow.                                                                                                               |
+| **`date.overrides`** \*        | Pass any valid props directly to the [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md) |
+| **`date.timeIntervals`** \*    | Time intervals to display. Defaults to 30 minutes.                                                                                     |
+| **`date.timeFormat`** \*       | Determines time format. Defaults to `'h:mm aa'`.                                                                                       |
 
-_* This property is passed directly to [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md)._
+_\* This property is passed directly to [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md). ._
 
 ### Display Format and Picker Appearance
 
 These properties only affect how the date is displayed in the UI. The full date is always stored in the format `YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:ss.SSSZ` (e.g. `1999-01-01T8:00:00.000+05:00`).
 
-`displayFormat` determines how the date is presented in the field **cell**, you can pass any valid [unicode date format](https://date-fns.org/v4.1.0/docs/format).
+`displayFormat` determines how the date is presented in the field **cell**, you can pass any valid (unicode date format)[https://date-fns.org/v2.29.3/docs/format].
 
 `pickerAppearance` sets the appearance of the **react datepicker**, the options available are `dayAndTime`, `dayOnly`, `timeOnly`, and `monthOnly`. By default, the datepicker will display `dayOnly`.
 

docs/fields/email.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyEmailField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ export const MyEmailField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/group.mdx

@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ export const MyGroupField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`fields`** *        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`label`**            | Used as a heading in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                    |
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export const MyGroupField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/join.mdx

@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ APIs.
 
 The Join field is useful in scenarios including:
 
-- To surface `Orders` for a given `Product`
+- To surface `Order`s for a given `Product`
 - To view and edit `Posts` belonging to a `Category`
 - To work with any bi-directional relationship data
 - Displaying where a document or upload is used in other documents
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ are related to the Category are populated for you. This is extremely powerful an
 of relationship types in an easy manner.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  The Join field is extremely performant and does not add additional query overhead to your API responses until you add depth of 1 or above. It works in all database adapters. In MongoDB, we use **aggregations** to automatically join in related documents, and in relational databases, we use joins.
+  The Join field is extremely performant and does not add additional query overhead to your API responses until you add depth of 1 or above. It works in all database adapters. In MongoDB, we use <strong>aggregations</strong> to automatically join in related documents, and in relational databases, we use joins.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Schema advice
@@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ powerful Admin UI.
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
 |------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                    |
-| **`collection`** *    | The `slug`s having the relationship field.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`on`** *            | The name of the relationship or upload field that relates to the collection document. Use dot notation for nested paths, like 'myGroup.relationName'.                                         |
-| **`where`**            | A `Where` query to hide related documents from appearing. Will be merged with any `where` specified in the request.                                                                            |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                    |
+| **`collection`** \*    | The `slug`s having the relationship field.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`on`** \*            | The name of the relationship or upload field that relates to the collection document. Use dot notation for nested paths, like 'myGroup.relationName'.                                          |
+| **`where`** \*         | A `Where` query to hide related documents from appearing. Will be merged with any `where` specified in the request.                                                                            |
 | **`maxDepth`**         | Default is 1, Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth). |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                        |
 | **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                          |
@@ -136,20 +136,18 @@ powerful Admin UI.
 | **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-config-options).                                                                                                                           |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                     |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`graphQL`**          | Custom graphQL configuration for the field. [More details](/docs/graphql/overview#field-complexity)                                                                                            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 
 ## Admin Config Options
 
 You can control the user experience of the join field using the `admin` config properties. The following options are supported:
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                               |
-|------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`defaultColumns`**   | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show in the relationship table. Default is the collection config. |
-| **`allowCreate`**      | Set to `false` to remove the controls for making new related documents from this field.                                   |
-| **`components.Label`** | Override the default Label of the Field Component. [More details](../admin/fields#label)                                  |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                            |
+|------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`allowCreate`**      | Set to `false` to remove the controls for making new related documents from this field. |
+| **`components.Label`** | Override the default Label of the Field Component. [More details](../admin/fields#label) |
 
 ## Join Field Data
 

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ export const MyJSONField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ export const MyJSONField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/number.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyNumberField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`min`**              | Minimum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
 | **`max`**              | Maximum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ export const MyNumberField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   Each field is an object with at least the `type` property. This matches the field to its corresponding Field Type. [More details](#field-options).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Here are the available Presentational Fields:
 - [UI](/docs/fields/ui) - blank field for custom UI components
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   Don't see a Field Type that fits your needs? You can build your own using a [Custom Field Component](../admin/fields#field).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -212,7 +212,6 @@ Functions can be written to make use of the following argument properties:
 
 - `user` - the authenticated user object
 - `locale` - the currently selected locale string
-- `req` - the `PayloadRequest` object
 
 Here is an example of a `defaultValue` function:
 
@@ -228,15 +227,15 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   name: 'attribution',
   type: 'text',
   // highlight-start
-  defaultValue: ({ user, locale, req }) =>
+  defaultValue: ({ user, locale }) =>
     `${translation[locale]} ${user.name}`,
   // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-  You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests or Local API using `req.payload`.
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Validation
@@ -378,7 +377,7 @@ export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   The Custom ID Fields can only be of type [`Number`](./number) or [`Text`](./text).
 
   Custom ID fields with type `text` must not contain `/` or `.` characters.

docs/fields/point.mdx

@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ export const MyPointField: Field = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   The Point Field currently is not supported in SQLite.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ export const MyPointField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                               |
 | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
 | **`label`**            | Used as a field label in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                          |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ export const MyPointField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                               |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                          |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ export const MyRadioField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`options`** *       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ export const MyRadioField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
-
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
   Option values should be strings that do not contain hyphens or special characters due to GraphQL
   enumeration naming constraints. Underscores are allowed. If you determine you need your option
   values to be non-strings or contain special characters, they will be formatted accordingly before

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
 | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                           |
-| **`relationTo`** *    | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                    |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                          |
+| **`relationTo`** \*    | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                   |
 | **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                                 |
 | **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                   |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                           |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                             |
-| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/queries/depth#max-depth)                        |
+| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth) |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                         |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                    |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                    |
@@ -61,12 +61,11 @@ export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                       |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                     |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                |
-| **`graphQL`**          | Custom graphQL configuration for the field. [More details](/docs/graphql/overview#field-complexity)                                                                             |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   The [Depth](../queries/depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate related documents that are returned by the API.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -87,12 +86,12 @@ export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
 
 The Relationship Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                              |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`isSortable`**               | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`). |
 | **`allowCreate`**              | Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field.                             |
-| **`allowEdit`**                | Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to edit documents from within the relationship field.                                   |
-| **`sortOptions`**              | Define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's dropdown. [More](#sort-options)                                |
+| **`allowEdit`**              | Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to edit documents from within the relationship field.                             |
+| **`sortOptions`**              | Define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's dropdown. [More](#sortOptions)                                |
 
 ### Sort Options
 
@@ -120,9 +119,15 @@ Example:
 
 ```ts
 sortOptions: {
-  "pages": "fieldName1",
-  "posts": "-fieldName2",
-  "categories": "fieldName3"
+  "pages"
+:
+  "fieldName1",
+    "posts"
+:
+  "-fieldName2",
+    "categories"
+:
+  "fieldName3"
 }
 ```
 
@@ -150,7 +155,6 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 | `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field |
 | `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation      |
 | `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                 |
-| `req`         | The Payload Request, which contains references to `payload`, `user`, `locale`, and more.              |
 
 ## Example
 
@@ -186,12 +190,12 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-
-  When a relationship field has both **filterOptions** and a custom{' '}
-  **validate** function, the api will not validate **filterOptions**{' '}
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  When a relationship field has both <strong>filterOptions</strong> and a custom{' '}
+  <strong>validate</strong> function, the api will not validate <strong>filterOptions</strong>{' '}
   unless you call the default relationship field validation function imported from{' '}
-  **payload/shared** in your validate function.
+  <strong>payload/shared</strong> in your validate function.
 </Banner>
 
 ## Bi-directional relationships
@@ -214,7 +218,9 @@ of collection.
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owner', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -246,7 +252,9 @@ tells Payload which Collections are valid to reference.
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owner', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -285,7 +293,9 @@ The `hasMany` tells Payload that there may be more than one collection saved to
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owners', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -313,7 +323,9 @@ When querying documents, the format does not change for arrays:
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owners', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -368,8 +380,8 @@ However, you **cannot** query on any field values within the related document.
 Since we are referencing multiple collections, the field you are querying on may not exist and break the query.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-
-  You **cannot** query on a field within a polymorphic relationship as you would with a
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  You <strong>cannot</strong> query on a field within a polymorphic relationship as you would with a
   non-polymorphic relationship.
 </Banner>

docs/fields/rich-text.mdx

@@ -1,44 +1,62 @@
 ---
-description: The Rich Text field allows dynamic content to be written through the Admin Panel. Learn how to use Rich Text fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+title: Rich Text Field
 label: Rich Text
 order: 140
-title: Rich Text Field
+desc: The Rich Text field allows dynamic content to be written through the Admin Panel. Learn how to use Rich Text fields, see examples and options.
+keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-The Rich Text Field lets editors write and format dynamic content in a familiar interface. The content is saved as JSON in the database and can be converted to HTML or any other format needed.
+The Rich Text Field is a powerful way to allow editors to write dynamic content. The content is saved as JSON in the database and can be converted into any format, including HTML, that you need.
 
-Consistent with Payload's goal of making you learn as little of Payload as possible, customizing and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a Payload rich text editor.
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png"
+  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
+/>
 
-Instead, you can invest your time and effort into learning the underlying open-source tools that will allow you to apply your learnings elsewhere as well.
+Payload's rich text field is built on an "adapter pattern" which lets you specify which rich text editor you'd like to use.
 
-<LightDarkImage alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel" caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field" srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png" srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"/>
+Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
+
+1. [SlateJS](/docs/rich-text/slate) - stable, backwards-compatible with 1.0
+2. [Lexical](/docs/lexical/overview) - beta, where things will be moving
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>
+    Consistent with Payload's goal of making you learn as little of Payload as possible, customizing
+    and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a{' '}<em>Payload</em>{' '}rich text editor.
+  </strong>
+
+  Instead, you can invest your time and effort into learning the underlying open-source tools that
+  will allow you to apply your learnings elsewhere as well.
+</Banner>
 
 ## Config Options
 
-|   Option                   |   Description                                                                                                                                                        |
-| --- | --- |
-|   **`name`** *            |   To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](../fields/overview#field-names)                                             |
-|   **`label`**              |   Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                            |
-|   **`validate`**           |   Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](../fields/overview#validation)                       |
-|   **`saveToJWT`**          |   If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](../authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                    |
-|   **`hooks`**              |   Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                              |
-|   **`access`**             |   Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                 |
-|   **`hidden`**             |   Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                   |
-|   **`defaultValue`**       |   Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](../fields/overview#default-values)                                                               |
-|   **`localized`**          |   Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](../configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                    |
-|   **`required`**           |   Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                |
-|   **`admin`**              |   Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                      |
-|   **`editor`**             |   Customize or override the rich text editor. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                 |
-|   **`custom`**             |   Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                          |
-|   **`typescriptSchema`**   |   Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                        |
-|   **`virtual`**            |   Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)   |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                           |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                          |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                  |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                            |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                               |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                 |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                             |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                  |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                              |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                    |
+| **`editor`**           | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                        |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                      |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges) |
 
-** An asterisk denotes that a property is required.*
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 
-To customize the appearance and behavior of the Rich Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option. The Rich Text Field inherits all the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options).
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Rich Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload'
@@ -51,9 +69,14 @@ export const MyRichTextField: Field = {
 }
 ```
 
-Further customization can be done with editor-specific options.
+The Rich Text Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                         |
+| **`hideGutter`**               | Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel.                                                         |
+| **`rtl`**                      | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.            |
 
 ## Editor-specific Options
 
-For a ton more editor-specific options, including how to build custom rich text elements directly into your editor,
-take a look at the [rich text editor documentation](../rich-text/overview).
+For a ton more editor-specific options, including how to build custom rich text elements directly into your editor, take a look at either the [Slate docs](/docs/rich-text/slate) or the [Lexical docs](/docs/lexical/overview) depending on which editor you're using.

docs/fields/row.mdx

@@ -35,11 +35,11 @@ export const MyRowField: Field = {
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                |
 | --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`fields`** * | Array of field types to nest within this Row.                                                                                                                              |
+| **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Row.                                                                                                                              |
 | **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration excluding `description`, `readOnly`, and `hidden`. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                  |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ export const MySelectField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                       |
-| **`options`** *       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                                    |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                       |
+| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                                    |
 | **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                               |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                      |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                 |
@@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ export const MySelectField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                             |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Option values should be strings that do not contain hyphens or special characters due to GraphQL
   enumeration naming constraints. Underscores are allowed. If you determine you need your option
   values to be non-strings or contain special characters, they will be formatted accordingly before
@@ -204,4 +204,4 @@ If you are looking to create a dynamic select field, the following tutorial will
   drawerTitle="How to Create a Custom Select Field: A Step-by-Step Guide"
 />
 
-If you want to learn more about custom components check out the [Admin > Custom Component](/docs/admin/fields) docs.
+If you want to learn more about custom components check out the [Admin > Custom Component](/docs/admin/components#field) docs.

docs/fields/tabs.mdx

@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ export const MyTabsField: Field = {
 
 | Option        | Description                                                                                                              |
 | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`tabs`** * | Array of tabs to render within this Tabs field.                                                                          |
+| **`tabs`** \* | Array of tabs to render within this Tabs field.                                                                          |
 | **`admin`**   | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**  | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                |
 
@@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ Each tab must have either a `name` or `label` and the required `fields` array. Y
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
 | **`name`**          | Groups field data into an object when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                      |
 | **`label`**         | The label to render on the tab itself. Required when name is undefined, defaults to name converted to words.                                                                                                 |
-| **`fields`** *     | The fields to render within this tab.                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`fields`** \*     | The fields to render within this tab.                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | **`description`**   | Optionally render a description within this tab to describe the contents of the tab itself.                                                                                                                  |
 | **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). (`name` must be present) |
 | **`virtual`**       | Provide `true` to disable field in the database (`name` must be present). See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                    |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyTextField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ export const MyTextField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 

docs/fields/textarea.mdx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export const MyTextareaField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ export const MyTextareaField: Field = {
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Options
 
@@ -68,12 +68,11 @@ export const MyTextareaField: Field = {
 
 The Textarea Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`placeholder`**  | Set this property to define a placeholder string in the textarea.                                                           |
-| **`autoComplete`** | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                                   |
-| **`rows`**         | Set the number of visible text rows in the textarea. Defaults to `2` if not specified.                                      |
-| **`rtl`**          | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction. |
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`** | Set this property to define a placeholder string in the textarea.                                               |
+| **`autoComplete`** | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                      |
+| **`rtl`** | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction. |
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/ui.mdx

@@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ export const MyUIField: Field = {
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                         |
 | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** *                    | A unique identifier for this field.                                                                                 |
+| **`name`** \*                   | A unique identifier for this field.                                                                                 |
 | **`label`**                     | Human-readable label for this UI field.                                                                             |
-| **`admin.components.Field`** *  | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit View. [More](../admin/fields#field)                   |
-| **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](../admin/fields#cell)                 |
+| **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit View. [More](../admin/components/#field)    |
+| **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](../admin/components/#field) |
 | **`admin.disableListColumn`**   | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent the UI field from appearing in the list view column selector.          |
 | **`custom`**                    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                           |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 

docs/fields/upload.mdx

@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ export const MyUploadField: Field = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   To use the Upload Field, you must have a [Collection](../configuration/collections) configured to allow [Uploads](../upload/overview).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ export const MyUploadField: Field = {
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 |------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`name`** *          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`relationTo`** *    | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. **Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.**        |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`relationTo`** \*    | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
 | **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
 | **`hasMany`**          | Boolean which, if set to true, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with hasMany.                                                                         |
@@ -68,9 +68,8 @@ export const MyUploadField: Field = {
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 | **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
-| **`graphQL`**          | Custom graphQL configuration for the field. [More details](/docs/graphql/overview#field-complexity)                                                                         |
 
-_* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 
@@ -108,9 +107,8 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 | `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field |
 | `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation      |
 | `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                 |
-| `req`         | The Payload Request, which contains references to `payload`, `user`, `locale`, and more.              |
 
-### Example#filter-options-example
+## Example
 
 ```ts
 const uploadField = {
@@ -126,12 +124,12 @@ const uploadField = {
 You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-
-  When an upload field has both **filterOptions** and a custom{' '}
-  **validate** function, the api will not validate **filterOptions**{' '}
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  When an upload field has both <strong>filterOptions</strong> and a custom{' '}
+  <strong>validate</strong> function, the api will not validate <strong>filterOptions</strong>{' '}
   unless you call the default upload field validation function imported from{' '}
-  **payload/shared** in your validate function.
+  <strong>payload/shared</strong> in your validate function.
 </Banner>
 
 ## Bi-directional relationships

docs/getting-started/concepts.mdx

@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Hooks allow you to execute your own side effects during specific events of the D
 
 ## Authentication
 
-Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the Admin Panel, as well as your own external applications. [More details](../authentication/overview).
+Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the Admin Panel, all well as your own external applications. [More details](../authentication/overview).
 
 ## Access Control
 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Everything Payload does (create, read, update, delete, login, logout, etc.) is e
 - [GraphQL](#graphql) - A full GraphQL API with a GraphQL Playground
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   All of these APIs share the exact same query language. [More details](../queries/overview).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -68,10 +68,15 @@ Here's a quick example of a React Server Component fetching data using the Local
 ```tsx
 import React from 'react'
 import config from '@payload-config'
-import { getPayload } from 'payload'
+import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
 
 const MyServerComponent: React.FC = () => {
-  const payload = await getPayload({ config })
+  // If you're working in Next.js, and you want HMR,
+  // you should get Payload via the `getPayloadHMR` function.
+  const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
+
+  // If you are writing a standalone script and do not need HMR,
+  // you can get Payload via import { getPayload } from 'payload' instead.
 
   // The `findResult` here will be fully typed as `PaginatedDocs<Page>`,
   // where you will have the `docs` that are returned as well as
@@ -127,7 +132,7 @@ You can use any GraphQL client with Payload's GraphQL endpoint. Here are a few p
 Payload is abstracted into a set of dedicated packages to keep the core `payload` package as lightweight as possible. This allows you to only install the parts of Payload based on your unique project requirements.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Version numbers of all official Payload packages are always published in sync. You should make sure that you always use matching versions for all official Payload packages.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -151,7 +156,7 @@ Whereas Payload itself is responsible for direct database access, and control ov
 
 `@payloadcms/graphql`
 
-All of Payload's GraphQL functionality is abstracted into a separate package. Payload, its Admin UI, and REST API have absolutely no overlap with GraphQL, and you will incur no performance overhead from GraphQL if you are not using it. However, it's installed within the `@payloadcms/next` package so you don't have to install it manually. You do, however, need to have GraphQL installed separately in your `package.json` if you are using GraphQL.
+All of Payload's GraphQL functionality is abstracted into a separate package. Payload, its Admin UI, and REST API have absolutely no overlap with GraphQL, and you will incur no performance overhead from GraphQL if you are not using it. However, it's installed within in the `@payloadcms/next` package so you don't have to install it manually. You do, however, need to have GraphQL installed separately in your `package.json` if you are using GraphQL.
 
 `@payloadcms/ui`
 
@@ -166,6 +171,6 @@ You can choose which Database Adapter you'd like to use for your project, and no
 Payload's Rich Text functionality is abstracted into separate packages and if you want to enable Rich Text in your project, you'll need to install one of these packages. We recommend Lexical for all new projects, and this is where Payload will focus its efforts on from this point, but Slate is still supported if you have already built with it.
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Rich Text is entirely optional and you may not need it for your project.
 </Banner>

docs/getting-started/installation.mdx

@@ -10,12 +10,12 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
 
 Payload requires the following software:
 
-- Any JavaScript package manager (pnpm, npm, or yarn - pnpm is preferred)
+- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm - pnpm is preferred)
 - Node.js version 20.9.0+
-- Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB, Postgres or SQLite)
+- Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB or Postgres)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Before proceeding any further, please ensure that you have the above requirements met.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -24,19 +24,19 @@ Payload requires the following software:
 To quickly scaffold a new Payload app in the fastest way possible, you can use [create-payload-app](https://npmjs.com/package/create-payload-app). To do so, run the following command:
 
 ```
-npx create-payload-app
+npx create-payload-app@beta
 ```
 
 Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside. You can then start [configuring your application](../configuration/overview).
 
 ## Adding to an existing app
 
-Adding Payload to an existing Next.js app is super straightforward. You can either run the `npx create-payload-app` command inside your Next.js project's folder, or manually install Payload by following the steps below.
+Adding Payload to an existing Next.js app is super straightforward. You can either run the `npx create-payload-app@beta` command inside your Next.js project's folder, or manually install Payload by following the steps below.
 
 If you don't have a Next.js app already, but you still want to start a project from a blank Next.js app, you can create a new Next.js app using `npx create-next-app` - and then just follow the steps below to install Payload.
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Note:** Next.js version 15 or higher is required for Payload.
+  <strong>Note:</strong> Next.js version 15 or higher is required for Payload.
 </Banner>
 
 #### 1. Install the relevant packages
@@ -44,12 +44,12 @@ If you don't have a Next.js app already, but you still want to start a project f
 First, you'll want to add the required Payload packages to your project and can do so by running the command below:
 
 ```bash
-pnpm i payload @payloadcms/next @payloadcms/richtext-lexical sharp graphql
+pnpm i payload@beta @payloadcms/next@beta @payloadcms/richtext-lexical@beta sharp graphql
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:**
-  Swap out `pnpm` for your package manager. If you are using npm, you might need to install using legacy peer deps: `npm i --legacy-peer-deps`.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Swap out `pnpm` for your package manager. If you are using NPM, you might need to install using legacy peer deps: `npm i --legacy-peer-deps`.
 </Banner>
 
 Next, install a [Database Adapter](/docs/database/overview). Payload requires a Database Adapter to establish a database connection. Payload works with all types of databases, but the most common are MongoDB and Postgres.
@@ -58,22 +58,22 @@ To install a Database Adapter, you can run **one** of the following commands:
 
 - To install the [MongoDB Adapter](../database/mongodb), run:
     ```bash
-    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-mongodb
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-mongodb@beta
     ```
 
 - To install the [Postgres Adapter](../database/postgres), run:
     ```bash
-    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-postgres
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-postgres@beta
     ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Note:**
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   New [Database Adapters](/docs/database/overview) are becoming available every day. Check the docs for the most up-to-date list of what's available.
 </Banner>
 
 #### 2. Copy Payload files into your Next.js app folder
 
-Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run. You can copy these files from the [Blank Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/blank/src/app/(payload)) on GitHub. Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
+Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run. You can copy these files from the [Blank Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/blank/src/app/(payload)) on GitHub. Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
 
 ```plaintext
 app/
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ export default withPayload(nextConfig) // highlight-line
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Payload is a fully ESM project, and that means the `withPayload` function is an ECMAScript module.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -181,6 +181,6 @@ Once you have a Payload Config, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` that
 
 #### 5. Fire it up!
 
-After you've reached this point, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going. By default, the Next.js dev script is `pnpm dev` (or `npm run dev` if using npm).
+After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going. By default, the Next.js dev script is `pnpm dev` (or `npm run dev` if using NPM).
 
 After it starts, you can go to `http://localhost:3000/admin` to create your first Payload user!

docs/getting-started/what-is-payload.mdx

@@ -3,12 +3,12 @@ title: What is Payload?
 label: What is Payload?
 order: 10
 desc: Payload is a next-gen application framework that can be used as a Content Management System, enterprise tool framework, headless commerce platform, or digital asset management tool.
-keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react
+keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <YouTube
-  id="ftohATkHBi0"
-  title="Introduction to Payload — The open-source Next.js backend"
+  id="In_lFhzmbME"
+  title="Payload Introduction - Closing the Gap Between Headless CMS and Application Frameworks"
 />
 
 **Payload is the Next.js fullstack framework.** Write a Payload Config and instantly get:
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
 
 ### Instant backend superpowers
 
-No matter what you're building, Payload will give you backend superpowers. Your entire Payload config can be installed in one line into any existing Next.js app, and is designed to catapult your development process. Payload takes the most complex and time-consuming parts of any modern web app and makes them simple.
+No matter what you're building, Payload will give you backend superpowers. It can be installed in one line into any existing Next.js app, and is designed to catapult your development process. Payload takes the most complex and time-consuming parts of any modern web app and makes them simple.
 
 ### Open source - deploy anywhere, including Vercel
 
@@ -95,6 +95,12 @@ Payload can integrate with any payment processor like Stripe and its content aut
 
 If you can build your storefront with a single backend, and only offload things like payment processing, the code will be simpler and the editing experience will be significantly streamlined. Manage products, catalogs, page content, media, and more—all in one spot.
 
+Payload's official Ecommerce template gives you everything you need for a storefront out of the box, including a Next.js frontend, product variations, and a full Stripe implementation:
+
+```
+npx create-payload-app@latest -t ecommerce
+```
+
 ### Digital Asset Management
 
 Payload's API-first tagging, sorting, and querying engine lends itself perfectly to all types of content that a CMS might ordinarily store, but these strong fundamentals also make it a formidable Digital Asset Management (DAM) tool as well.

docs/graphql/graphql-schema.mdx

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ In Payload the schema is controlled by your collections and globals. All you nee
 Install `@payloadcms/graphql` as a dev dependency:
 
 ```bash
-pnpm add @payloadcms/graphql -D
+pnpm add @payloadcms/graphql@beta -D
 ```
 
 Run the following command to generate the schema:
@@ -62,17 +62,17 @@ type Collection1 {
 
 The above example outputs all your definitions to a file relative from your payload config as `./graphql/schema.graphql`. By default, the file will be output to your current working directory as `schema.graphql`.
 
-### Adding an npm script
+### Adding an NPM script
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important**
-
+  <strong>Important</strong>
+  <br />
   Payload needs to be able to find your config to generate your GraphQL schema.
 </Banner>
 
 Payload will automatically try and locate your config, but might not always be able to find it. For example, if you are working in a `/src` directory or similar, you need to tell Payload where to find your config manually by using an environment variable.
 
-If this applies to you, create an npm script to make generating types easier:
+If this applies to you, create an NPM script to make generating types easier:
 
 ```json
 // package.json

docs/graphql/overview.mdx

@@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ At the top of your Payload Config you can define all the options to manage Graph
 | `maxComplexity`                 | A number used to set the maximum allowed complexity allowed by requests [More](/docs/graphql/overview#query-complexity-limits)  |
 | `disablePlaygroundInProduction` | A boolean that if false will enable the GraphQL playground, defaults to true. [More](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-playground) |
 | `disable`                       | A boolean that if true will disable the GraphQL entirely, defaults to false.                                                    |
-| `validationRules`               | A function that takes the ExecutionArgs and returns an array of ValidationRules.                                                |
 
 ## Collections
 
@@ -43,8 +42,8 @@ export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
 
 **Payload will automatically open up the following queries:**
 
-| Query Name          | Operation           |
-| ------------------- | ------------------- |
+| Query Name              | Operation           |
+| ------------------      | ------------------- |
 | `PublicUser`        | `findByID`          |
 | `PublicUsers`       | `find`              |
 | `countPublicUsers`  | `count`             |
@@ -116,8 +115,8 @@ GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled
 You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation to use the Playground as an authenticated user.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
-
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
   To see more regarding how the above queries and mutations are used, visit your GraphQL playground
   (by default at
   [`${SERVER_URL}/api/graphql-playground`](http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground))
@@ -125,55 +124,6 @@ You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation t
   see a ton of detail about how GraphQL operates within Payload.
 </Banner>
 
-## Custom Validation Rules
-
-You can add custom validation rules to your GraphQL API by defining a `validationRules` function in your Payload Config. This function should return an array of [Validation Rules](https://graphql.org/graphql-js/validation/#validation-rules) that will be applied to all incoming queries and mutations.
-
-```ts
-import { GraphQL } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  graphQL: {
-    validationRules: (args) => [
-      NoProductionIntrospection
-    ]
-  },
-  // ...
-})
-
-const NoProductionIntrospection: GraphQL.ValidationRule = (context) => ({
-  Field(node) {
-    if (process.env.NODE_ENV === 'production') {
-      if (node.name.value === '__schema' || node.name.value === '__type') {
-        context.reportError(
-          new GraphQL.GraphQLError(
-            'GraphQL introspection is not allowed, but the query contained __schema or __type',
-            { nodes: [node] }
-          )
-        );
-      }
-    }
-  }
-})
-```
-
 ## Query complexity limits
 
 Payload comes with a built-in query complexity limiter to prevent bad people from trying to slow down your server by running massive queries. To learn more, [click here](/docs/production/preventing-abuse#limiting-graphql-complexity).
-
-## Field complexity
-
-You can define custom complexity for `relationship`, `upload` and `join` type fields. This is useful if you want to assign a higher complexity to a field that is more expensive to resolve. This can help prevent users from running queries that are too complex.
-
-```ts
-const fieldWithComplexity = {
-  name: 'authors',
-  type: 'relationship',
-  relationship: 'authors',
-  graphQL: {
-    complexity: 100, // highlight-line
-  }
-}
-```

docs/hooks/collections.mdx

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   You can also set hooks on the field-level to isolate hook logic to specific fields. [More details](./fields).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -186,13 +186,13 @@ const beforeReadHook: CollectionBeforeReadHook = async ({
 
 The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
 
-| Option           | Description                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`** | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                 |
-| **`context`**    | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                       |
-| **`doc`**        | The resulting Document after changes are applied.                                                                                                     |
-| **`query`**      | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.                                                                                                      |
-| **`req`**        | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations. |
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 ### afterRead
 
@@ -210,13 +210,13 @@ const afterReadHook: CollectionAfterReadHook = async ({
 
 The following arguments are provided to the `afterRead` hook:
 
-| Option           | Description                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`** | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                 |
-| **`context`**    | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                       |
-| **`doc`**        | The resulting Document after changes are applied.                                                                                                     |
-| **`query`**      | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.                                                                                                      |
-| **`req`**        | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations. |
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 ### beforeDelete
 

docs/hooks/context.mdx

@@ -28,8 +28,6 @@ To pass data between hooks, you can assign values to context in an earlier hook
 For example:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
 const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'customers',
   hooks: {
@@ -45,6 +43,7 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
       },
     ],
     afterChange: [
+
       async ({ context, doc, req }) => {
         // use context.customerData without needing to fetch it again
         if (context.customerData.contacted === false) {
@@ -66,14 +65,12 @@ Let's say you have an `afterChange` hook, and you want to do a calculation insid
 Bad example:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
 const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'customers',
   hooks: {
     afterChange: [
-      async ({ doc, req }) => {
-        await req.payload.update({
+      async ({ doc }) => {
+        await payload.update({
           // DANGER: updating the same slug as the collection in an afterChange will create an infinite loop!
           collection: 'customers',
           id: doc.id,
@@ -95,18 +92,16 @@ Instead of the above, we need to tell the `afterChange` hook to not run again if
 Fixed example:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
 const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'slug',
   hooks: {
     afterChange: [
-      async ({ context, doc, req }) => {
+      async ({ context, doc }) => {
         // return if flag was previously set
         if (context.triggerAfterChange === false) {
           return
         }
-        await req.payload.update({
+        await payload.update({
           collection: contextHooksSlug,
           id: doc.id,
           data: {
@@ -130,7 +125,7 @@ const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 
 The default TypeScript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
 
-This is known as "type augmentation", a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing types. Simply put this in any `.ts` or `.d.ts` file:
+This is known as "type augmentation", a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any `.ts` or `.d.ts` file:
 
 ```ts
 import { RequestContext as OriginalRequestContext } from 'payload'

docs/hooks/fields.mdx

@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ export const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
 All Field Hooks accept an array of synchronous or asynchronous functions. These functions can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. All Field Hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based the specific hook type.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Due to GraphQL's typed nature, changing the type of data that you return from a field will produce errors in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). If you need to change the shape or type of data, consider [Collection Hooks](./collections) or [Global Hooks](./hooks) instead.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ The following arguments are provided to all Field Hooks:
 | **`value`**              | The value of the [Field](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                                                               |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For example, if you are writing a `beforeChange` hook, you may want to perform different logic based on if the current `operation` is `create` or `update`.
 </Banner>
 

docs/hooks/globals.mdx

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ export const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
 ```
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  **Tip:**
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
   You can also set hooks on the field-level to isolate hook logic to specific fields. [More details](./fields).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -163,14 +163,14 @@ const afterReadHook: GlobalAfterReadHook = async ({
 
 The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
 
-| Option         | Description                                                                                                                                           |
-| -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**   | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                         |
-| **`context`**  | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                       |
-| **`findMany`** | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions).                                                  |
-| **`doc`**      | The resulting Document after changes are applied.                                                                                                     |
-| **`query`**    | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.                                                                                                      |
-| **`req`**      | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations. |
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`findMany`**            | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 ## TypeScript
 

docs/hooks/overview.mdx

@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ There are four main types of Hooks in Payload:
 - [Field Hooks](/docs/hooks/fields)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Reminder:**
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   Payload also ships a set of _React_ hooks that you can use in your frontend application. Although they share a common name, these are very different things and should not be confused. [More details](../admin/hooks).
 </Banner>
 
@@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ There are four main types of Hooks in Payload:
 
 Root Hooks are not associated with any specific Collection, Global, or Field. They are useful for globally-oriented side effects, such as when an error occurs at the application level.
 
-To add Root Hooks, use the `hooks` property in your [Payload Config](/docs/configuration/overview):
+To add Root Hooks, use the `hooks` property in your [Payload Config](/docs/configuration/config):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import {  buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The following options are available:
 The `afterError` Hook is triggered when an error occurs in the Payload application. This can be useful for logging errors to a third-party service, sending an email to the development team, logging the error to Sentry or DataDog, etc. The output can be used to transform the result object / status code.
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import {  buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...

docs/jobs-queue/jobs.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: jobs queue, application framework, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 Now that we have covered Tasks and Workflows, we can tie them together with a concept called a Job.
 
 <Banner type="default">
-  Whereas you define Workflows and Tasks, which control your business logic, a **Job** is an individual instance of either a Task or a Workflow which contains many tasks.
+  Whereas you define Workflows and Tasks, which control your business logic, a <strong>Job</strong> is an individual instance of either a Task or a Workflow which contains many tasks.
 </Banner>
 
 For example, let's say we have a Workflow or Task that describes the logic to sync information from Payload to a third-party system. This is how you'd declare how to sync that info, but it wouldn't do anything on its own. In order to run that task or workflow, you'd create a Job that references the corresponding Task or Workflow.

docs/jobs-queue/overview.mdx

@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Examples:
 
 **Periodic sync or similar scheduled action**
 
-Some applications may need to perform a regularly scheduled operation of some type. Jobs are perfect for this because you can execute their logic using `cron`, scheduled nightly, every twelve hours, or some similar time period.
+Some applications may need to perform a regularly scheduled operation of some type. Jobs are perfect for this because you can execute their logic using `cron`, scheduled nightly, every twelve hours, or some similar time period. 
 
 Examples:
 
@@ -42,29 +42,29 @@ Examples:
 
 **Offloading complex operations**
 
-You may run into the need to perform computationally expensive functions which might slow down your main Payload API server(s). The Jobs Queue allows you to offload these tasks to a separate compute resource rather than slowing down the server(s) that run your Payload APIs. With Payload Task definitions, you can even keep large dependencies out of your main Next.js bundle by dynamically importing them only when they are used. This keeps your Next.js + Payload compilation fast and ensures large dependencies do not get bundled into your Payload production build.
+You may run into the need to perform computationally expensive functions which might slow down your main Payload API server(s). The Jobs Queue allows you to offload these tasks a separate compute resource rather than slowing down the server(s) that run your Payload APIs. With Payload Task definitions, you can even keep large dependencies out of your main Next.js bundle by dynamically importing them only when they are used. This keeps your Next.js + Payload compilation fast and ensures large dependencies do not get bundled into your Payload production build.
 
 Examples:
 
 - You need to create (and then keep in sync) vector embeddings of your documents as they change, but you use an open source model to generate embeddings
 - You have a PDF generator that needs to dynamically build and send PDF versions of documents to customers
 - You need to use a headless browser to perform some type of logic
-- You need to perform a series of actions, each of which depends on a prior action and should be run in as "durable" of a fashion as possible
+- You need to perform a series of actions, each of which depends on a prior action and should be run in as "durable" of a fashion as possible 
 
 ### How it works
 
 There are a few concepts that you should become familiarized with before using Payload's Jobs Queue. We recommend learning what each of these does in order to fully understand how to leverage the power of Payload's Jobs Queue.
 
-1. [Tasks](/docs/jobs-queue/tasks)
-1. [Workflows](/docs/jobs-queue/workflows)
-1. [Jobs](/docs/jobs-queue/jobs)
-1. [Queues](/docs/jobs-queue/queues)
+1. [Tasks](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/tasks)
+1. [Workflows](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/workflows)
+1. [Jobs](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/jobs)
+1. [Queues](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/queues)
 
-All of these pieces work together in order to allow you to offload long-running, expensive, or future scheduled work from your main APIs.
+All of these pieces work together in order to allow you to offload long-running, expensive, or future scheduled work from your main APIs. 
 
 Here's a quick overview:
 
 - A Task is a specific function that performs business logic
 - Workflows are groupings of specific tasks which should be run in-order, and can be retried from a specific point of failure
 - A Job is an instance of a single task or workflow which will be executed
-- A Queue is a way to segment your jobs into different "groups" - for example, some to run nightly, and others to run every 10 minutes
+- A Queue is a way to segment your jobs into different "groups" - for example, some to run nightly, and others to run every 10 minutes 

docs/jobs-queue/queues.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: jobs queue, application framework, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 Queues are the final aspect of Payload's Jobs Queue and deal with how to _run your jobs_. Up to this point, all we've covered is how to queue up jobs to run, but so far, we aren't actually running any jobs.
 
 <Banner type="default">
-  A **Queue** is a grouping of jobs that should be executed in order of when they were added.
+  A <strong>Queue</strong> is a grouping of jobs that should be executed in order of when they were added.
 </Banner>
 
 When you go to run jobs, Payload will query for any jobs that are added to the queue and then run them. By default, all queued jobs are added to the `default` queue.
@@ -25,33 +25,7 @@ Then, you could configure two different runner strategies:
 
 ## Executing jobs
 
-As mentioned above, you can queue jobs, but the jobs won't run unless a worker picks up your jobs and runs them. This can be done in four ways:
-
-#### Cron jobs
-
-You can use the jobs.autoRun property to configure cron jobs:
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  // Other configurations...
-  jobs: {
-    tasks: [
-      // your tasks here
-    ],
-    // autoRun can optionally be a function that receives payload as an argument
-    autoRun: [
-      {
-        cron: '0 * * * *', // every hour at minute 0
-        limit: 100, // limit jobs to process each run
-        queue: 'hourly', // name of the queue
-      },
-      // add as many cron jobs as you want
-    ],
-  },
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">autoRun is intended for use with a dedicated server that is always running, and should not be used on serverless platforms like Vercel.</Banner>
+As mentioned above, you can queue jobs, but the jobs won't run unless a worker picks up your jobs and runs them. This can be done in two ways:
 
 #### Endpoint
 
@@ -124,24 +98,11 @@ After the project is deployed to Vercel, the Vercel Cron job will automatically
 
 If you want to process jobs programmatically from your server-side code, you can use the Local API:
 
-**Run all jobs:**
-
 ```ts
 const results = await payload.jobs.run()
 
 // You can customize the queue name and limit by passing them as arguments:
 await payload.jobs.run({ queue: 'nightly', limit: 100 })
-
-// You can provide a where clause to filter the jobs that should be run:
-await payload.jobs.run({ where: { 'input.message': { equals: 'secret' } } })
-```
-
-**Run a single job:**
-
-```ts
-const results = await payload.jobs.runByID({
-  id: myJobID
-})
 ```
 
 #### Bin script

docs/jobs-queue/tasks.mdx

@@ -2,15 +2,15 @@
 title: Tasks
 label: Tasks
 order: 20
-desc: A Task is a distinct function declaration that can be run within Payload's Jobs Queue.
+desc: A Task is a distinct function declaration that can be run within Payload's Jobs Queue. 
 keywords: jobs queue, application framework, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 <Banner type="default">
-  A **"Task"** is a function definition that performs business logic and whose input and output are both strongly typed.
+  A <strong>"Task"</strong> is a function definition that performs business logic and whose input and output are both strongly typed.
 </Banner>
 
-You can register Tasks on the Payload config, and then create [Jobs](/docs/jobs-queue/jobs) or [Workflows](/docs/jobs-queue/workflows) that use them. Think of Tasks like tidy, isolated "functions that do one specific thing".
+You can register Tasks on the Payload config, and then create [Jobs](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/jobs) or [Workflows](/docs/beta/jobs-queue/workflows) that use them. Think of Tasks like tidy, isolated "functions that do one specific thing".
 
 Payload Tasks can be configured to automatically retried if they fail, which makes them valuable for "durable" workflows like AI applications where LLMs can return non-deterministic results, and might need to be retried.
 
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ Simply add a task to the `jobs.tasks` array in your Payload config. A task consi
 | Option                      | Description                                                                      |
 | --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `slug` | Define a slug-based name for this job. This slug needs to be unique among both tasks and workflows.|
-| `handler`   | The function that should be responsible for running the job. You can either pass a string-based path to the job function file, or the job function itself. If you are using large dependencies within your job, you might prefer to pass the string path because that will avoid bundling large dependencies in your Next.js app. Passing a string path is an advanced feature that may require a sophisticated build pipeline in order to work.         |
+| `handler`   | The function that should be responsible for running the job. You can either pass a string-based path to the job function file, or the job function itself. If you are using large dependencies within your job, you might prefer to pass the string path because that will avoid bundling large dependencies in your Next.js app.         |
 | `inputSchema` | Define the input field schema - payload will generate a type for this schema. |
 | `interfaceName` | You can use interfaceName to change the name of the interface that is generated for this task. By default, this is "Task" + the capitalized task slug. |
 | `outputSchema` | Define the output field schema - payload will generate a type for this schema. |
 | `label` | Define a human-friendly label for this task. |
 | `onFail` | Function to be executed if the task fails. |
 | `onSuccess` | Function to be executed if the task succeeds. |
-| `retries` | Specify the number of times that this step should be retried if it fails. If this is undefined, the task will either inherit the retries from the workflow or have no retries. If this is 0, the task will not be retried. By default, this is undefined. |
+| `retries` | Specify the number of times that this step should be retried if it fails. |
 
 The logic for the Task is defined in the `handler` - which can be defined as a function, or a path to a function. The `handler` will run once a worker picks picks up a Job that includes this task.
 
@@ -93,8 +93,6 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 In addition to defining handlers as functions directly provided to your Payload config, you can also pass an _absolute path_ to where the handler is defined. If your task has large dependencies, and you are planning on executing your jobs in a separate process that has access to the filesystem, this could be a handy way to make sure that your Payload + Next.js app remains quick to compile and has minimal dependencies.
 
-Keep in mind that this is an advanced feature that may require a sophisticated build pipeline, especially when using it in production or within Next.js, e.g. by calling opening the `/api/payload-jobs/run` endpoint. You will have to transpile the handler files separately and ensure they are available in the same location when the job is run. If you're using an endpoint to execute your jobs, it's recommended to define your handlers as functions directly in your Payload Config, or use import paths handlers outside of Next.js.
-
 In general, this is an advanced use case. Here's how this would look:
 
 `payload.config.ts:`
@@ -141,111 +139,3 @@ export const createPostHandler: TaskHandler<'createPost'> = async ({ input, job,
   }
 }
 ```
-
-### Configuring task restoration
-
-By default, if a task has passed previously and a workflow is re-run, the task will not be re-run. Instead, the output from the previous task run will be returned. This is to prevent unnecessary re-runs of tasks that have already passed.
-
-You can configure this behavior through the `retries.shouldRestore` property. This property accepts a boolean or a function.
-
-If `shouldRestore` is set to true, the task will only be re-run if it previously failed. This is the default behavior.
-
-If `shouldRestore` this is set to false, the task will be re-run even if it previously succeeded, ignoring the maximum number of retries.
-
-If `shouldRestore` is a function, the return value of the function will determine whether the task should be re-run. This can be used for more complex restore logic, e.g you may want to re-run a task up to X amount of times and then restore it for consecutive runs, or only re-run a task if the input has changed.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  jobs: {
-    tasks: [
-      {
-        slug: 'myTask',
-        retries: {
-          shouldRestore: false,
-        }
-        // ...
-      } as TaskConfig<'myTask'>,
-    ]
-  }
-})
-```
-
-Example - determine whether a task should be restored based on the input data:
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  jobs: {
-    tasks: [
-      {
-        slug: 'myTask',
-        inputSchema: [
-          {
-            name: 'someDate',
-            type: 'date',
-            required: true,
-          },
-        ],
-        retries: {
-          shouldRestore: ({ input }) => {
-            if(new Date(input.someDate) > new Date()) {
-              return false
-            }
-            return true
-          },
-        }
-        // ...
-      } as TaskConfig<'myTask'>,
-    ]
-  }
-})
-```
-
-## Nested tasks
-
-You can run sub-tasks within an existing task, by using the `tasks` or `ìnlineTask` arguments passed to the task `handler` function:
-
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  jobs: {
-    // It is recommended to set `addParentToTaskLog` to `true` when using nested tasks, so that the parent task is included in the task log
-    // This allows for better observability and debugging of the task execution
-    addParentToTaskLog: true,
-    tasks: [
-      {
-        slug: 'parentTask',
-        inputSchema: [
-          {
-            name: 'text',
-            type: 'text'
-          },
-        ],
-        handler: async ({ input, req, tasks, inlineTask }) => {
-
-          await inlineTask('Sub Task 1', {
-            task: () => {
-              // Do something
-              return {
-                output: {},
-              }
-            },
-          })
-
-          await tasks.CreateSimple('Sub Task 2', {
-            input: { message: 'hello' },
-          })
-
-          return {
-            output: {},
-          }
-        }
-      } as TaskConfig<'parentTask'>,
-    ]
-  }
-})
-```

docs/jobs-queue/workflows.mdx

@@ -2,12 +2,12 @@
 title: Workflows
 label: Workflows
 order: 30
-desc: A Task is a distinct function declaration that can be run within Payload's Jobs Queue.
+desc: A Task is a distinct function declaration that can be run within Payload's Jobs Queue. 
 keywords: jobs queue, application framework, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 <Banner type="default">
-  A **"Workflow"** is an optional way to *combine multiple tasks together* in a way that can be gracefully retried from the point of failure.
+  A <strong>"Workflow"</strong> is an optional way to <em>combine multiple tasks together</em> in a way that can be gracefully retried from the point of failure.
 </Banner>
 
 They're most helpful when you have multiple tasks in a row, and you want to configure each task to be able to be retried if they fail.
@@ -25,12 +25,11 @@ To define a JS-based workflow, simply add a workflow to the `jobs.wokflows` arra
 | Option                      | Description                                                                      |
 | --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `slug` | Define a slug-based name for this workflow. This slug needs to be unique among both tasks and workflows.|
-| `handler`   | The function that should be responsible for running the workflow. You can either pass a string-based path to the workflow function file, or workflow job function itself. If you are using large dependencies within your workflow, you might prefer to pass the string path because that will avoid bundling large dependencies in your Next.js app. Passing a string path is an advanced feature that may require a sophisticated build pipeline in order to work.       |
+| `handler`   | The function that should be responsible for running the workflow. You can either pass a string-based path to the workflow function file, or workflow job function itself. If you are using large dependencies within your workflow, you might prefer to pass the string path because that will avoid bundling large dependencies in your Next.js app.         |
 | `inputSchema` | Define the input field schema - payload will generate a type for this schema. |
 | `interfaceName` | You can use interfaceName to change the name of the interface that is generated for this workflow. By default, this is "Workflow" + the capitalized workflow slug. |
 | `label` | Define a human-friendly label for this workflow. |
 | `queue` | Optionally, define the queue name that this workflow should be tied to. Defaults to "default". |
-| `retries` | You can define `retries` on the workflow level, which will enforce that the workflow can only fail up to that number of retries. If a task does not have retries specified, it will inherit the retry count as specified on the workflow. You can specify `0` as `workflow` retries, which will disregard all `task` retry specifications and fail the entire workflow on any task failure. You can leave `workflow` retries as undefined, in which case, the workflow will respect what each task dictates as their own retry count. By default this is undefined, meaning workflows retries are defined by their tasks |
 
 Example:
 

docs/lexical/building-custom-features.mdx

@@ -10,154 +10,12 @@ Before you begin building custom features for Lexical, it is crucial to familiar
 
 Lexical features are designed to be modular, meaning each piece of functionality is encapsulated within just two specific interfaces: one for server-side code and one for client-side code.
 
-By convention, these are named `feature.server.ts` for server-side functionality and `feature.client.ts` for client-side functionality. The primary functionality is housed within `feature.server.ts`, which users will import into their projects. The client-side feature, although defined separately, is integrated and rendered server-side through the server feature.
+By convention, these are named feature.server.ts for server-side functionality and feature.client.ts for client-side functionality. The primary functionality is housed within feature.server.ts, which users will import into their projects. The client-side feature, although defined separately, is integrated and rendered server-side through the server feature. That way, we still maintain a clear boundary between server and client code, while also centralizing the code needed for a feature in basically one place. This approach is beneficial for managing all the bits and pieces which make up your feature as a whole, such as toolbar entries, buttons, or new nodes, allowing each feature to be neatly contained and managed independently.
 
-That way, we still maintain a clear boundary between server and client code, while also centralizing the code needed for a feature in basically one place. This approach is beneficial for managing all the bits and pieces which make up your feature as a whole, such as toolbar entries, buttons, or new nodes, allowing each feature to be neatly contained and managed independently.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  **Important:**
-  Do not import directly from core lexical packages - this may break in minor Payload version bumps.
-
-  Instead, import the re-exported versions from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`. For example, change `import { $insertNodeToNearestRoot } from '@lexical/utils'` to `import { $insertNodeToNearestRoot } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical/utils'`
-</Banner>
-
-## Do I need a custom feature?
-
-Before you start building a custom feature, consider whether you can achieve your desired functionality using the existing `BlocksFeature`. The `BlocksFeature` is a powerful feature that allows you to create custom blocks with a variety of options, including custom React components, markdown converters, and more. If you can achieve your desired functionality using the `BlocksFeature`, it is recommended to use it instead of building a custom feature.
-
-Using the BlocksFeature, you can add both inline blocks (= can be inserted into a paragraph, in between text) and block blocks (= take up the whole line) to the editor. If you simply want to bring custom react components into the editor, this is the way to go.
-
-### Example: Code Field Block with language picker
-
-This example demonstrates how to create a custom code field block with a language picker using the `BlocksFeature`. Make sure to manually install `@payloadcms/ui`first.
-
-Field config:
-
-```ts
-import {
-  BlocksFeature,
-  lexicalEditor,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-export const languages = {
-  ts: 'TypeScript',
-  plaintext: 'Plain Text',
-  tsx: 'TSX',
-  js: 'JavaScript',
-  jsx: 'JSX',
-}
-
-// ...
-{
-  name: 'richText',
-  type: 'richText',
-  editor: lexicalEditor({
-    features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
-      ...defaultFeatures,
-      BlocksFeature({
-        blocks: [
-          {
-            slug: 'Code',
-            fields: [
-              {
-                type: 'select',
-                name: 'language',
-                options: Object.entries(languages).map(([key, value]) => ({
-                  label: value,
-                  value: key,
-                })),
-                defaultValue: 'ts',
-              },
-              {
-                admin: {
-                  components: {
-                    Field: './path/to/CodeComponent#Code',
-                  },
-                },
-                name: 'code',
-                type: 'code',
-              },
-            ],
-          }
-        ],
-        inlineBlocks: [],
-      }),
-    ],
-  }),
-},
-```
-
-CodeComponent.tsx:
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-
-import type { CodeFieldClient, CodeFieldClientProps } from 'payload'
-
-import { CodeField, useFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-import React, { useMemo } from 'react'
-
-import { languages } from './yourFieldConfig'
-
-const languageKeyToMonacoLanguageMap = {
-  plaintext: 'plaintext',
-  ts: 'typescript',
-  tsx: 'typescript',
-}
-
-export const Code: React.FC<CodeFieldClientProps> = ({
-  autoComplete,
-  field,
-  forceRender,
-  path,
-  permissions,
-  readOnly,
-  renderedBlocks,
-  schemaPath,
-  validate,
-}) => {
-  const languageField = useFormFields(([fields]) => fields['language'])
-
-  const language: string =
-    (languageField?.value as string) || (languageField.initialValue as string) || 'typescript'
-
-  const label = languages[language as keyof typeof languages]
-
-  const props: CodeFieldClient = useMemo<CodeFieldClient>(
-    () => ({
-      ...field,
-      type: 'code',
-      admin: {
-        ...field.admin,
-        label,
-        language: languageKeyToMonacoLanguageMap[language] || language,
-      },
-    }),
-    [field, language, label],
-  )
-
-  const key = `${field.name}-${language}-${label}`
-
-  return (
-    <CodeField
-      autoComplete={autoComplete}
-      field={props}
-      forceRender={forceRender}
-      key={key}
-      path={path}
-      permissions={permissions}
-      readOnly={readOnly}
-      renderedBlocks={renderedBlocks}
-      schemaPath={schemaPath}
-      validate={validate}
-    />
-  )
-}
-```
 
 ## Server Feature
 
-Custom Blocks are not enough? To start building a custom feature, you should start with the server feature, which is the entry-point.
+To start building new features, you should start with the server feature, which is the entry-point.
 
 **Example myFeature/feature.server.ts:**
 
@@ -191,7 +49,8 @@ import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
  },
 ```
 
-By default, this server feature does nothing - you haven't added any functionality yet. Depending on what you want your feature to do, the ServerFeature type exposes various properties you can set to inject custom functionality into the lexical editor.
+By default, this server feature does nothing - you haven't added any functionality yet. Depending on what you want your
+feature to do, the ServerFeature type exposes various properties you can set to inject custom functionality into the lexical editor.
 
 ### i18n
 
@@ -218,13 +77,13 @@ export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
 
 This allows you to add i18n translations scoped to your feature. This specific example translation will be available under `lexical:myFeature:label` - `myFeature` being your feature key.
 
-### Markdown Transformers#server-feature-markdown-transformers
+### Markdown Transformers
 
-The Server Feature, just like the Client Feature, allows you to add markdown transformers. Markdown transformers on the server are used when [converting the editor from or to markdown](/docs/rich-text/converters#markdown-lexical).
+The Server Feature, just like the Client Feature, allows you to add markdown transformers. Markdown transformers on the server are used when [converting the editor from or to markdown](/docs/lexical/converters#markdown-lexical).
 
 ```ts
 import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-import type { ElementTransformer } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical/markdown'
+import type { ElementTransformer } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import {
   $createMyNode,
   $isMyNode,
@@ -261,7 +120,7 @@ export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
 
 In this example, the node will be outputted as `+++` in Markdown, and the markdown `+++` will be converted to a `MyNode` node in the editor.
 
-### Nodes#server-feature-nodes
+### Nodes
 
 While nodes added to the server feature do not control how the node is rendered in the editor, they control other aspects of the node:
 - HTML conversion
@@ -407,23 +266,7 @@ export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
 
 Explore the APIs available through ClientFeature to add the specific functionality you need. Remember, do not import directly from `'@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'` when working on the client-side, as it will cause errors with webpack or turbopack. Instead, use `'@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client'` for all client-side imports. Type-imports are excluded from this rule and can always be imported.
 
-### Adding a client feature to the server feature
-
-Inside of your server feature, you can provide an [import path](/docs/admin/components#component-paths) to the client feature like this:
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: {
-    ClientFeature: './path/to/feature.client#MyClientFeature',
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-  dependenciesPriority: ['otherFeature'],
-})
-```
-
-### Nodes#client-feature-nodes
+### Nodes
 
 Add nodes to the `nodes` array in **both** your client & server feature. On the server side, nodes are utilized for backend operations like HTML conversion in a headless editor. On the client side, these nodes are integral to how content is displayed and managed in the editor, influencing how they are rendered, behave, and saved in the database.
 
@@ -456,9 +299,9 @@ import type {
   EditorConfig,
   LexicalNode,
   SerializedLexicalNode,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical'
+} from 'lexical'
 
-import { $applyNodeReplacement, DecoratorNode } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical'
+import { $applyNodeReplacement, DecoratorNode } from 'lexical'
 
 // SerializedLexicalNode is the default lexical node.
 // By setting your SerializedMyNode type to SerializedLexicalNode,
@@ -605,17 +448,17 @@ Example plugin.tsx:
 'use client'
 import type {
   LexicalCommand,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical'
+} from 'lexical'
 
 import {
   createCommand,
   $getSelection,
   $isRangeSelection,
   COMMAND_PRIORITY_EDITOR
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical'
+} from 'lexical'
 
-import { useLexicalComposerContext } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical/react/LexicalComposerContext.js'
-import { $insertNodeToNearestRoot } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical/utils'
+import { useLexicalComposerContext } from '@lexical/react/LexicalComposerContext.js'
+import { $insertNodeToNearestRoot } from '@lexical/utils'
 import { useEffect } from 'react'
 
 import type { PluginComponent } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical' // type imports can be imported from @payloadcms/richtext-lexical - even on the client
@@ -746,7 +589,7 @@ import { createClientFeature, toolbarAddDropdownGroupWithItems } from '@payloadc
 import { IconComponent } from './icon';
 import { $isHorizontalRuleNode } from './nodes/MyNode';
 import { INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND } from './plugin';
-import { $isNodeSelection } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical'
+import { $isNodeSelection } from 'lexical'
 
 export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
    toolbarFixed: {
@@ -862,13 +705,13 @@ export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
 | **`keywords`** | Keywords are used to match the item for different texts typed after the '/'. E.g. you might want to show a horizontal rule item if you type both /hr, /separator, /horizontal etc. In addition to the keywords, the label and key will be used to find the right slash menu item. |
 
 
-### Markdown Transformers#client-feature-markdown-transformers
+### Markdown Transformers
 
 The Client Feature, just like the Server Feature, allows you to add markdown transformers. Markdown transformers on the client are used to create new nodes when a certain markdown pattern is typed in the editor.
 
 ```ts
 import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import type { ElementTransformer } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/lexical/markdown'
+import type { ElementTransformer } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import {
   $createMyNode,
   $isMyNode,
@@ -993,4 +836,4 @@ The reason the client feature does not have the same props available as the serv
 
 ## More information
 
-Have a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/richtext-lexical/src/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of Payload or not!
+Have a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/richtext-lexical/src/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of Payload or not!